Home

SMC Networks SMC6724L3 User's Manual

1. spanning tree pathcost method 4 152 Use this command to configure the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method e long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 e short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 4 154 takes precedence over port priority page 4 155 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit Use this command to configure the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config 4 153 COMMAND LINE IN
2. 3 175 Configuring General Protocol Settings 3 176 CONTENTS Specifying Network Interfaces for RIP 3 178 Configuring Network Interfaces for RIP 3 179 Displaying RIP Information and Statistics 3 183 Configuring the Open Shortest Path First Protocol 3 186 Configuring General Protocol Settings 3 188 Configuring OSPF Areas oooooocccocoooocccmomo 3 192 Configuring Area Ranges Route Summarization for ABRs 3 196 Configuring OSPF Interfaces o ooooooooooo omo 3 198 Configuring Virtual Links 0 0 0 3 204 Configuring Network Area Addresses 3 206 Configuring Summary Addresses for External AS Routes 3 208 Redistributing External Routes ooooooooooooo 3 210 Configuring NSSA Settings ooooocoooommoccm o ooo 3 212 Displaying Link State Database Information 3 213 Displaying Information on Border Routers 3 216 Displaying Information on Neighbor Routers 3 217 Multicast Roun o sea conc diets dia le Mead ded 3 218 Configuring Global Settings for Multicast Routing 3 219 Displaying the Multicast Routing Table 3 219 Configuring DVMRP s enis e a a ce eee 3 222 Configuring Global DVMRP Settings 3 223 Configuring DVMRP Interface Settings 3 227 Displaying Neighbor Information 4 3 229 Displaying the Routing Table o
3. 3 56 Configuring Address Pools 0 0 0 6 00 c eee 3 57 Displaying Address Bindings 00 00000048 3 62 Port Configuration bid da olla toe BN aoe Mes ls 3 63 Displaying Connection Status 0 eee eee 3 63 Configuring Interface Connections 0 0000 3 67 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds ooooo ooooooo 3 69 viii CONTENTS Configuring Port Mirroring 00 eee eee 3 70 Showing Port Statistics 0 eee eee 3 71 Configuring Rate Limits cuina a 3 77 Trine Configuration A A A a 3 79 Dynamically Configuring a Trunk ooooo ooooommom o 3 80 Statically Configuring a Trunk 1 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 82 Address Table Settings omita SG ees a ee ed 3 84 Setting Static Addresses sss horna i oa a o R eee 3 84 Displaying the Address Table ooooo oooommmmo mr o o 3 85 Changing the Aging Time oooooooococccooocorcc o 3 87 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration oooooooommmmom or 3 87 Displaying Global Settings ooooooococoooonommmc oo 3 89 Configuring Global Settings oooooooocorocommmm 3 92 Displaying Interface Settings oooooococooommmmm m r lt o 3 95 Configuring Interface Settings oooooooocorooommmo 3 99 VLAN Gonfigurationy miccional See a aa 3 102 OVENI EN 2h dis ita Fee eA Pith hh a ae 3 102 Assigning Ports to VLANS 0 2 0 eee eee eee 3 103 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames 3 106 Enabling or Disabling GVRP
4. Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 e The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the IP ACL or MAC ACL If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface the bind operation will fail e An access list can only contain all permit rules or all deny rules In other words for performance reasons you cannot mix permit and deny rules in the same list 3 41 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 42 The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 SE IS User defined rules in the MAC ACL User defined rules in the IP ACL Explicit default rule permit any any in the IP ACL Explicit default rule permit any any in the MAC ACL If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes ACL Configuration Setting the Name and Type Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol
5. Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 170 Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 171 MIRROR Port COMMANDS Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target pott Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 133 show port Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 134 monitor port monitor Use this command to configure a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor nterface rx tx both no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Switch unit 1 port Port number e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON 4 133 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner e T
6. Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version number of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master i e operating stand alone Expansion Slots Expansion Slot Indicates any installed module type CLI only Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information BASIC CONFIGURATION Main Board Serial Number harr111111 Number of Ports 26 Hardware Version ROA Internal Power Status Active Management Software Loader Version 0065 Boot ROM Version 0 0 5 2 Operation Code Version 1 2 0 4 Role Master Expansion Slot Expansion Slot 1 1000Base SX SC MMF Expansion Slot 2 1000BaseT sl CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 52 Unit1 Serial number Service tag Hardware version Number of ports Main power status Redundant power status Agent master Unit id Loader version Boot rom version Operation code version Console OOG D O eS 1111111111 ROA 26 up not present NUO NNW 3 15 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 16 The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to displa
7. 3 185 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI The information displayed by the RIP Statistics screen via the Web interface can be accessed from the CLI using the following commands Console show rip globals 4 242 RIP Process Enabled Update Time in Seconds 30 Number of Route Change 4 Number of Queries 0 Console show ip rip configuration 4 242 Interface SendMode ReceiveMode Poison Authentication 10 1 0 253 riplCompatible RIPvl10rv2 SplitHorizon noAuthentication 10 1 1 253 riplCompatible RIPv10rv2 SplitHorizon noAuthentication Console show ip rip status 4 242 Interface RevBadPackets RevBadRoutes SendUpdates 10 1 0 253 0 0 60 10 1 1 253 0 0 63 Console show ip rip peer 4 242 Peer UpdateTime Version RevBadPackets RevBadRoutes 10 1 0 254 4610 2 0 0 10 1 1 254 4610 2 0 0 Console Configuring the Open Shortest Path First Protocol 3 186 Open Shortest Path First OSPF is more suited for large area networks which experience frequent changes in the links It also handles subnets much better than RIP OSPF protocol actively tests the status of each link to its neighbors to generate a shortest path tree and builds a routing table based on this information OSPF then utilizes IP multicast to propagate routing information A separate routing area scheme is also used to further reduce the amount of routing traffic Note The OSPF protocol implemented in this device is based on Version 2 RFC 2328 It also supports Version 1 R
8. Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click dot1X dot1X Port configuration Select the authentication mode from the drop down box and click Apply dot1X Port Configuration Port Status Mode Autheorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Enabled Force Unauthorized y No 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 Disabled Force Authonzed y 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 Disabled Force Authorzed v 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 Enabled Auto hz No 00 00 E8 98 73 21 5 Disabled Force Authorized y 00 00 00 00 00 00 gt USER AUTHENTICATION CLI This example sets the authentication mode to enable dot1x on port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if i dot1x port control auto 4 68 Console config if 4 119 Displaying 802 1x Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Statistical Values Parameter Description Rx EXPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not
9. Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers Command Function Mode Page snmp server Sets up the community access string to permit GC 4 90 community access to SNMP commands snmp server Sets the system contact string GC 4 91 contact snmp server Sets the system location string GC 4 92 location snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP GC 4 93 notification operation snmp server enable Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e GC 4 94 traps SNMP notifications show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE 4 95 PE snmp server community Use this command to define the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community s ring ro rw no snmp server community s ring e string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects 4 90 SNMP CoMMANDS Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized manage
10. Displaying Neighbor Information You can display all the neighboring PIM DM routers Command Attributes e Neighbor Address IP address of the next hop router Interface VLAN that is attached to this neighbor Up time The duration this entry has been active Expire The time before this entry will be removed Mode PIM mode used on this interface Only Dense Mode is supported Web Click Routing Protocol PIM DM Neighbor Information PIM DM Neighbor Information Neighbor Address Interface Uptime Expire Mode 10 1 0 253 VLANI 596 78 Entry Count 1 CLI This example displays the only neighboring PIM DM router Console show ip pim neighbor 4 309 Address VLAN Interface Uptime Expire Mode 10 1 0 253 dE 613 91 Dense Console 3 237 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 238 CHAPTER 4 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user
11. Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only private read write Range 1 32 characters case sensitive SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL e Access Mode Read Only Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write y zi CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 90 Console config Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as SMC s EliteView You can specify up to five management stations that w
12. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices 1 5 INTRODUCTION 1 6 Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network e Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN except where a connection is explicitly defined via the switch s routing service Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to
13. The following restrictions apply to ACLs e Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 e The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the IP ACL or MAC ACL If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface the bind operation will fail e An access list can only contain all permit rules or all deny rules In other words for performance reasons you cannot mix permit and deny rules in the same list The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the MAC ACL User defined rules in the IP ACL Explicit default rule permit any any in the IP ACL Explicit default rule permit any any in the MAC ACL If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all eet ae 4 75 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Function Page Groups IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP 4 76 port number protocol type and TCP control code MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses 4 84 packet format and Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs 4 89 assigned to each port IP ACLs Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration GC 4 76
14. e Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree nterface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface Fora description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 92 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 95 4 160 Example SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information RSTP enable 32768 2 20 15 52 20 ilS 32768 0000ABCD0000 Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable Priority Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age sec sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec Transmission limit Path Cost Method Eth 1 1 information Admin status enable Role disable State discarding Path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 1 Designated root Designated bridge Forward transitions 0 Fast forwarding disable Admin edge port disable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type Console 32768 0000ABCD0000 32768 0000ABCD0000 point t
15. recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Id The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSre The source MAC address catried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 3 39 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Parameter Description Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Reg Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Web Select dot1X dot1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics dot1X Statistics Port la z Query Rx EXPOL Start 2 Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff O Rx Last EAPOLVer 1 Rx EAPOL Invalid ORx Last EAPOLSrc 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Rx EAPOL Total 1022 Tx EAPOL Total 2047 Rx EAP
16. Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect e This command defines how long any responder i e client or router still in the group has to respond to a query message before the router deletes the group By varying the Maximum Response Interval you can tune the burstiness of IGMP messages passed on the subnet where larger values make the traffic less bursty as host responses are spread out over a larger interval The number of seconds represented by the maximum response interval must be less than the Query Interval page 4 207 Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config if ip igmp max resp interval 20 Console config if Related Commands ip igmp version 4 210 ip igmp query interval 4 207 ip igmp last memb query interval Use this command to configure the last member query interval Use the no form of this command to restore the default Syntax ip igmp last memb query interval seconds no ip igmp last memb query interval seconds The report delay for the last member query Range 1 255 4 209 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 1 second Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e A multicast client sends an IGMP leave message when it leaves a group The router then checks to see if this was the last host in the group by sen
17. Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 63 4 128 INTEREACE COMMANDS Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 00 AB CD 00 01 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Current status Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 Information of VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 AB CD 00 00 Console show interfaces counters Use this command to display interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 129 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 130 Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 71 Ex
18. Default Setting 40 or four times the interval specified by the ip ospf hello interval command Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf dead interval 50 Console config if Related Commands ip ospf hello interval 4 268 4 267 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip ospf hello interval Use this command to specify the interval between sending hello packets on an interface Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip ospf hello interval seconds no ip ospf hello interval seconds Interval at which hello packets are sent from an interface This interval must be set to the same value for all routers on the network Range 1 65535 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting 10 seconds Command Usage Hello packets are used to inform other routers that the sending router is still active Setting the hello interval to a smaller value can reduce the delay in detecting topological changes but will increase routing traffic Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf hello interval 5 Console config if ip ospf priority Use this command to set the router priority used when determining the designated router DR and backup designated router BDR for an area Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip ospf priority priority no ip ospf priority priority Sets the interface priority for this r
19. If IP routing is enabled page 3 154 the router uses its routing tables to make routing decisions and uses Address Resolution Protocol ARP to forward traffic from one hop to the next ARP is used to map an IP address to a physical layer i e MAC address When an IP frame is received by this router or any standards based router it first looks up the MAC address corresponding to the destination IP address in the ARP cache If the address is found the router writes the MAC address into the 3 157 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 158 appropriate field in the frame header and forwards the frame on to the next hop IP traffic passes along the path to its final destination in this way with each routing device mapping the destination IP address to the MAC address of the next hop toward the recipient until the packet is delivered to the final destination If there is no entry for an IP address in the ARP cache the router will broadcast an ARP request packet to all devices on the network The ARP request contains the following fields similar to that shown in this example destination IP address 10 1 0 19 destination MAC address source IP address 10 1 0 253 soutce MAC address 00 00 ab cd 00 00 When devices receive this request they discard it if their address does not match the destination IP address in the message However if it does match they write their own hardware address into the destination MAC
20. Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Vlan 1 is up Metric is 1 Console DVMRP is enabled Console show ip dvmrp interface DM Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page router pim Enables PIM globally for the router GC 4 302 ip pim dense mode Enables PIM on the specified interface IC 4 303 ip pim hello interval Sets the interval between sending PIM hello IC 4 304 messages ip pim hello holdtime Sets the time to wait for hello messages IC 4 305 from a neighboring PIM router before declaring it dead ip pim Sets the maximum time before sending a IC 4 305 trigger hello interval triggered PIM Hello message ip pim Configures the hold time for the prune state IC 4 306 join prune holdtime ip pim Configures the time to wait for a Graft IC 4 307 graft retry interval acknowledgement before resending a Graft message ip pim Configures the maximum number of times IC 4 308 max graft retries to resend a Graft message if it has not been acknowledged show router pim Displays the global PIM configuration NE 4 308 settings PE 4 301 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Function Mode Page show ip pim interface Displays information about interfaces NE 4 309 configured for PIM PE show ip pim Displays information about PIM neighbors NE 4 309 neighbor PE router pim 4 302 Use this command to enable Protocol I
21. and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config show bridge ext Use this command to show the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 107 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 16 for a description of the displayed items 4 176 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Example Console show bridge ext Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console switchport gvrp Use this command to enable GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax switchport gvrp no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if 4 177 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show gvrp configuration Use this command to show if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port cha
22. any source bitmask host source any destination bitmask host destination protocol udp sport source port dport destination porl e any Any IP address source if first field destination if second field e source Source IP address destination Destination IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match 4 79 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 80 host Keyword followed by a specific IP address source port TCP UDP source port number Range 0 65535 destination port 0 65535 protocol number TCP UDP destination port number Range A specific protocol number Range 0 255 control code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 code bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Default Setting None Command Mode Extended ACL Command Usage All new rules are added to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with t which this ACL he address for each IP packet entering the port s to has been assigned e The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an eq
23. for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN awate devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unawate device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID VLAN CONFIGURATION Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLAN
24. the router forwards this traffic out through the other interfaces with known downstream routers However when multicast traffic with an unknown source address is received on another interface the router drops it because only the default upstream interface can forward multicast traffic from an unknown source Example Console config router default gateway 10 1 0 253 Console config router ip dvmrp 4 296 Use this command to enable DVMRP on the specified interface Use the no form to disable DVMRP on this interface Syntax ip dvmrp no ip dvmrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage To fully enable DVMRP you need to enable multicast routing globally for the router with the ip multicast routing command page 4 288 enable DVMRP globally for the router with the router dvmrp command page 4 291 and also enable DVMRP for each interface that will participate in multicast routing with the ip dvmrp command MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip dvmrp Console config if end Console show ip dvmrp interface Vlan 1 is up DVMRP is enabled Metric is 1 Console ip dvmrp metric Use this command to configure the metric used in selecting the reverse path to networks connected directly to an interface on this router Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip dvmrp metric nterfac
25. which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network 3 89 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 90 Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protoco
26. Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members 3 109 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 172 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Eth1 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Eth1 25 Eth1 26 Console Creating VLANs 3 110 Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables t
27. Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Trunk Port STA Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Part Role Member 1 Forwarding 1 0 32768 0000ABCD0000 126 1 Point to Point Disabled Designated 2 Discarding 0 O 32768 0000ABCDO000 128 2 _ Point to Point Disabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 0 32768 0000ABCD0000 128 3 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 4 Discarding 0 o 32768 0000ABCDO000 128 4 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 5 Discarding 0 O 32768 0000ABC00000 128 5 _ Point to Point Disabled Disabled 6 Discarding 0 0 32768 0000A6CD0000 126 6 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 7 Forwarding 1 0 132768 0000ABCDO000 128 7 Point to Point Disabled Designated xl 3 98 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Eth 1 1 information Admin status Role State Path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Forward transitions Fast forwarding Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Console Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 enable point to point 4 160 designate forwarding 100000 128 0 128 1 32768 0000ABCD0000 32768 0000ABCD0000 2 disable disable disable auto Configuring Int
28. Configuration routing displays the routing table and statistics for protocols used to exchange routing information Routing Configures global and interface specific parameters for 4 231 Information RIP Protocol RIP Open Shortest Configures global and interface specific parameters for 4 244 Path First OSPF OSPF 4 225 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Global Routing Configuration Command Function Mode Page ip routing Enables static and dynamic IP routing GC 4 226 ip route Configures static routes GC 4 227 cleat ip route Deletes specified entries from the routing table PE 4 228 show ip route Displays specified entries in the routing table PE 4 228 show ip traffic Displays statistics for IP ICMP UDP TCP and PE 4 229 ARP protocols ip routing 4 226 Use this command to enable IP routing Use the no form to disable IP routing Syntax ip routing no ip routing Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command affects both static and dynamic unicast routing If IP routing is enabled all IP packets are routed using either static routing or dynamic routing via RIP or OSPF and other packets for all non IP protocols e g NetBuei NetWare or AppleTalk are switched based on MAC addtesses If IP routing is disabled all packets are switched with filtering and forwarding decisions based strictly on MAC addresses
29. DC 4 108 servers available to a DHCP client next server Configures the next server in the boot process DC 4 109 of a DHCP client bootfile Specifies a default boot image for a DHCP DC 4 109 client netbios name serv Configures NetBIOS Windows Internet DC 4 110 er Naming Service WINS name servers available to Microsoft DHCP clients netbios node type Configures NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DC 4 111 DHCP clients lease Sets the duration an IP address is assigned to a DC 4 112 DHCP client host Specifies the IP address and network mask to DC 4 113 manually bind to a DHCP client client identifier Specifies a client identifier for a DHCP client DC 4 114 hardware address Specifies the hardware address of a DHCP DC 4 115 4 102 client DHCP CoMMANDS Command Function Mode Page clear ip dhcp Deletes an automatic address binding from the PE 4 116 binding DHCP server database show ip dhcp Displays address bindings on the DHCP PE NE 4 117 binding server These commands are used for manually binding an address to a client service dhcp Use this command to enable the DHCP server on this switch Use the no form to disable the DHCP server Syntax service dhcp no service dhcp Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config service dhcp Console config 4 103 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip dhcp excluded addre
30. Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 25 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 25 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console 4 131 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 132 Field Description Broadcast threshold Lacp status Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 126 Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 139 VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 166 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 168 Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 167 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 169 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 181 Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 177
31. Global Setting 3 107 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 00 3 107 Displaying Current VLANs 000 0 c cee 3 108 Creating VLANS feiss hides tastes adda de 3 110 Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index 3 111 Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index 3 113 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 114 Configuring Private VLANS 0 0 60 0 000 eee eee eee 3 118 Enabling Private VLANs 0 00 e cece eens 3 118 Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports 3 119 Class of Service Configuration 6 0 cece eee eee 3 120 Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3 120 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 0ooooooooooo 3 122 Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 124 Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values 3 125 Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority ooo oooo o 3 126 Mapping IP Precedence 0 0 cece cece eee 3 127 Mapping DSCP Priority 2 0 0 0 cece 3 129 ix CONTENTS Mapping IP Port Priority ooooooooooooccccoconmmm 3 131 Copying IP Settings to Another Interface ooo 3 133 Multicast Bilterino oi citar a lacy toe et 3 134 IGMP Protocol ve cs ties han cit eas eee tation Bek 3 135 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 0ooooccccoocomo 3 136 Configuring IGMP Snooping Parameters 3 137 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 139 Speci
32. I Enabled Forwarding i28 fiooooo Auo y P Enabled I Enabled Forwarding he fiooooo ao y l Enabled I Enabled Discarding i28 fooooo auto y r Enabled ln Enab ed Discarding 128 fiooooo Auo y P Enabled I Enabled Discarding i28 fooooo auto P Enabled I Enabled Forwarding Doo fo ato z l Enabled M Enabled zj SM OO Ss wln CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 119 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 155 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 154 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 4 158 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 156 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 4 159 Console config if VLAN Configuration Overview 3 102 In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment VLAN CONFIGURATION An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management b
33. IP DSCP Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority Interface Select DSCP Priority Table G Port 1 y C Trunk y DSCP6 CoS0 y Class of Service Value 1 0 7 Restore Default Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 5 DSCP mapping status disabled Eth 1 Console 4 191 4 119 4 191 4 195 3 130 Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority
34. If for any reason the DR fails the BDR takes over this role The router with the highest priority becomes the DR and the router with the next highest priority becomes the BDR If two or more routers are set to the same priority the router with the higher ID will be elected You can set the priority to zero to prevent a router from being elected as a DR or BDR Ifa DRalready exists for an area when this interface comes up the new router will accept the current DR regardless of its own priority The DR will not change until the next time the election process is initiated Transmit Delay Sets the estimated time to send a link state update packet over an interface Range 1 65535 seconds Default 1 LSAs have their age incremented by a delay before transmission You should consider both the transmission and propagation delays for an 3 199 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 200 interface when estimating this delay Set the transmit delay according to link speed using larger values for lower speed links The transmit delay must be the same for all routers in an autonomous system On slow links the router may send packets more quickly than devices can receive them To avoid this problem you can use the transmit delay to force the router to wait a specified interval between transmissions e Retransmit Interval Sets the time between resending link state advertisements Range 1 65535 seconds Default 1 A route
35. Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration Speed Duplex 1 3 Enable 3 El Enabled j M 10h 100h F 1000h F Sym maior moor M 1000f M FC Enabled M 10h M 100h F 1000h F Sym r f e z y a E2 Ensbla m10 Panor M1000 M FC Enabled v M 10h 100h F 1000h F Sym 5 Enable y H Kaot Panor FM 1000f M FC Port Name Admin Flow Control Autonegotiation Trunk f CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config interface ethernet 1 13 4 119 Console config if itdescription RD SW 13 4 119 Console config if shutdown 4 125 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 121 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 120 Console config if flowcontrol 4 124 Console config if negotiation Console config if capabilities 100half 4 122 Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol 3 68 PORT CONFIGURATION Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be s
36. Private VLAN Status Enabled y CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 4 173 Console config 3 118 VLAN CONFIGURATION Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 e C G 2 O O e 3 G 4 e Cc O 5 C G O 6 C ce O 7 C Ce zi CLI This configures ports 3 and 4 as uplinks and ports 5 and 6 as downlinks Console config pvlan uplink 1 3 4 downlink 1 5 6 4 173 Console config 3 119 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame
37. RIP Version 1 Command Usage e When this command is used to specify a global RIP version any VLAN interface not previously set by the ip rip receive version or ip rip send version command will be set to the following values RIP Version 1 configures the unset interfaces to send RIPv1 compatible protocol messages and receive either RIPv1 or RIPv2 protocol messages RIP Version 2 configures the unset interfaces to use RIP v2 for both sending and receiving protocol messages e When the no form of this command is used to restore the default value any VLAN interface not previously set by the ip rip receive version or ip rip send version command will be set to the default send ot receive version 4 235 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example sets the global version for RIP to send and receive version 2 packets Console config router version 2 Console config router Related Commands ip rip receive version 4 236 ip tip send version 4 237 ip rip receive version Use this command to specify a RIP version to receive on an interface Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip rip receive version none 1 2 12 no ip rip receive version none Does not accept incoming RIP packets e 1 Accepts only RIPv1 packets e 2 Accepts only RIPv2 packets e 12 Accepts RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting The default depends on the setting specifi
38. Summary Address Configuration Specify the base address and network mask then click Add Summary Address Configuration Current Summary Address Entries IP Address Netmask Remove 10 1 0 0 255 255 0 0 C Entry Count 1 Remove Summary Address Settings IP Address Netmask Add CLI This example This example creates a summary address for all routes contained in 192 168 x x Console config router summary address 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 4 253 Console config router 3 209 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 210 Redistributing External Routes You can configure this router to import external routing information from other routing protocols into the autonomous system OSPF AS Router RIP or static routes ASBR Command Usage e This router supports redistribution for both RIP and static routes e When you redistribute external routes into an OSPF autonomous system AS the router automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary router ASBR However if the router has been manually configured as an ASBR via the General Configuration screen but redistribution is not enabled the router will only generate a default external route into the AS if it has been configured to always advertise a default route even if an external route does not actually exist page 3 188 Metric type specifies the way to advertise routes to destinations outside
39. The external link type used to advertise the default route Type 1 route advertisements add the internal cost to the external route metric Type 2 routes do not add the internal cost metric When comparing Type 2 routes the internal cost is only used as a tie breaker if several Type 2 routes have the same cost Default Type 2 Default External Metric The Metric assigned to the default route Range 1 65535 Default 10 1 These items are read only 2 CLI These items are configured with the default information originate command page 248 IP ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF General Configuration Enable OSPE specify the Router ID configure the other global parameters as required and click Apply General Configuration General Information OSPF Routing Process Enabled OSPF Router ID 10 1 1 253 Version Number Version 2 Area Border Router Yes AS Boundary Router Enabled RFC1583 Compatible Disabled SPF Hold Time 0 65535 seconds 10 Area Numbers 3 Default Information Originate Default Route Enabled Advertise Default Route Always External Metric Type Type2 Default External Metric 0 16777215 fro CLI This example configures the router with the same settings as shown in the screen capture for the Web interface Console config router ospf 4 246 Console config router router id 10 1 1 253 4 247 Console config router no compat
40. Use this command to add a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan v an id static ip address interface no ip igmp snooping vlan v an id static ip address interface vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 p address IP address for multicast group gt interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 4 197 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config ip igmp snooping version Use this command to configure the IGMP snooping version Use the mo form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version e 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 e Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout 4 198 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console
41. Use this command to specify the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr community string no snmp server host host addr host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled 4 93 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE e However some notific
42. attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination Reassembly Required The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity Reassembly Failures The number of failures detected by the IP re assembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors etc Datagrams Failing Fragmentation The number of datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be e g because their Don t Fragment flag was set Received Header Errors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options etc IP ROUTING Parameter Description Unknown Protocols Received The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received Packets Delivered The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including ICMP Discarded Output Packets The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Fragments Created The number of datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmenta
43. config sntp client 4 42 Console config sntp poll 16 4 44 Console config fsntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 43 Console config sntp broadcast client 4 45 Console config Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes e Name Assigns a name to the time zone Hours 0 12 The number of hours before after UTC e Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Name Taiwan Hours 0 13 8 Minutes 0 59 0 Direction before utc after utc CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone 06 00 hours 6 minute 58 before UTC 4 46 Console CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to restart the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 4
44. control code 2 2 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 4 76 ip access group Use this command to bind a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax ip access group ac _name in no ip access group ac _name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to input packets 4 81 COMMAND LINE INTEREACE Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 83 show ip access group 4 82 Use this command to show the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 4 81 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS show ip access list Use this command to display the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL e extended Specifies an extended IP ACL e acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255
45. duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings e All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk Dynamically Configuring a Trunk 3 80 Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network dynamically be sure you enable LACP before enabled connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before disabling LACP active backup links link If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically configured members TRUNK CONFIGURATION A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation Web Click Trunk LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Unit Portl Unit Port18 lt lt Add Remove ra Ma 3 81 CONFIGURING THE
46. ip dhcp excluded addtess 0 0 00 c cece eee 4 104 ip dhcp pool ura ag A ad 4 104 Network La ast oe isos a Mote tds Jo 4 105 d fault router wan 6242 0 outs tad ena Blades bain 4 106 AAA dete Gl Mile Sd baths dota 4 107 dns server E O Saal 4 108 PEXELSELVED Li O dal Gide has dba 4 109 BOOtH ES id A ace a aan 4 109 netbios name servet 0 cece cece eee ees 4 110 netbios node type 2 6 eee 4 111 TGAS Ges Was as os Neches aba ie ALO cos AS 4 112 HOSES id badd doen Madea ovina Bead 4 113 Cherit id eritiMie ts MS A ted Bh ad 4 114 hardware address 0 ce cece cece ene e ences 4 115 clear ip dhcp binding 2 ps eih kiko io eee ee aed 4 116 show ip dhcp binding 6 6 0 0 eee eee ee 4 117 Intettace Commands 3 cach ead a a Ah ables i 4 118 Interface 6 deat Pee tae ew Ane ey ea 4 119 ESCHpPHONY sin a ee ee A ie ees We 4 119 speed duples cia a Ala da aed 4 120 A R es ea A Stl be 4 121 Capabilities Ita te cel tes oie Ac hte dol atten a Beaches 4 122 flOWCOMEOL 524 Ae ie nee rd 4 124 SUI hate ae det hd dee ad 4 125 switchport broadcast packet rate 6 eee 4 126 Clear COUNTES 4 0 ii ad 4 127 show Interfaces Statis oet cage de adan pidas 4 128 show interfaces Counters 0 cece eee teens 4 129 XV CONTENTS xvi show interfaces switchport 0 00 cece eee ee 4 Mirror Port Commands 0 6 0 cece eens 4 POLE Monitor vin ed ah A A 4 show pott MONO niai eee eens 4 Rate Limit Commands a aee
47. isolated area to the eae backbone the logical path area can cross a single non backbone area e transit area to reach the backbone To define this path you must configure an ABR that serves as an endpoint connecting the isolated area to the common transit area and specify a neighboring ABR as the other endpoint connecting the common transit area to the backbone itself Note that you cannot configure a virtual link that runs through a stub or NSSA area Virtual links can also be used to create a redundant link between any area and the backbone to help prevent partitioning or to connect two existing backbone areas into a common backbone Command Attributes e Area ID Identifies the transit area for the virtual link The area ID must be in the form of an IP address Neighbor Router ID Neighbor router at other end of the virtual link This must be an Area Border Router ABR that is adjacent to both the backbone and the transit area for the virtual link Events The number of state changes or error events on this virtual link The other items are described under Configuring OSPF Interfaces page 3 198 Note This router supports up 64 virtual links IP ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Virtual Link Configuration To create a new virtual link specify the Area ID and Neighbor Router ID configure the link attributes and click Add To modify the settings for an existing link click the Det
48. or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R A J x C 7 A D B SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated ort R R P p x J Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Admin status Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority 1 e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one p
49. periodically asks its hosts if they want to and L3 IGMP query receive multicast traffic It then propagates service requests on to any upstream multicast router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Layer 3 IGMP can be enabled for individual VLAN interfaces page 3 144 Note that Layer 2 snooping and query is disabled if Layer 3 IGMP is enabled MULTICAST FILTERING Configuring IGMP Interface Parameters This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service The hosts may respond with several types of IP multicast messages Hosts respond to queries with report messages that indicate which groups they want to join or the groups to which they already belong If a router does not receive a report message within a specified period of time it will prune that interface from the multicast tree A host can also submit a join message at any time without waiting for a query from the router Host can also signal when they no longer want to receive traffic for a specific group by sending a leave group message These IGMP messages are used by the router to identify ports containing multicast hosts and to restrict the downstream flow of multicast data to only these ports If more than one router on the LAN is performing IP multicasting one of these is elected as the querier and assumes the role of querying for group members
50. route It is an area border and autonomous system boundary router Redistributing External Routes from rip with metric mapped to 10 Number of area in this router is 2 Number of interfaces in this area is 1 SPF algorithm executed 19 times Number of interfaces in this area is 4 SPF algorithm executed 19 times Console Field Description Routing Process with ID Router ID Supports only single TOS TOSO route Type of service is not supported so you can only assign one cost per interface It is an router type The types displayed include internal area border or autonomous system boundary routers Number of areas in this router The number of configured areas Area identifier The area address and area type if backbone NSSA or stub Number of interfaces The number of interfaces attached to this area SPF algorithm executed The number of times the shortest path first algorithm has been executed for this area 4 271 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show ip ospf border routers 4 272 Use this command to show entries in the routing table that lead to an Area Border Router ABR or Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ospf border routers Destination Next Hop Cost Type RteType Area SPF No 40 1 1 252 10 1 1 253 0 ABR INTRA 10 1 0 0 3 10 2 6 252 10 2 9 253 0 ASBR INTER 10 2 0 0 7 Conso
51. 0 total 0 checksum errors 0 no port Sent 0 total TCP statistics Revd 0 total 0 checksum errors Sent 0 total ARP statistics Revd 0 requests 1 replies Sent 1 requests 0 replies Console Sent ooou 4 230 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Routing Information Protocol RIP Command Function Mode Page router rip Enables the RIP routing protocol GC 4 231 timers basic Sets basic timers including update timeout RC 4 232 garbage collection network Specifies the network interfaces that are to use RC 4 233 RIP routing neighbor Defines a neighboring router with which to RC 4 234 exchange information version Specifies the RIP version to use on all network RC 4 235 interfaces if not already specified with a receive version or send version command ip rip receive Sets the RIP receive version to use on a IC 4 236 version network interface ip rip send version Sets the RIP send version to use on a network IC 4 237 interface ip split horizon Enables split horizon or poison reverse loop IC 4 239 prevention ip rip Enables authentication for RIP2 packets and IC 4 240 authentication key specifies keys ip rip Specifies the type of authentication used for IC 4 241 authentication RIP2 packets mode show rip globals Displays global configuration settings and PE 4 242 statistics for RIP show ip rip Displays RIP configuration information for PE 4 242 each networ
52. 28 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test User Authentication Use the Passwords or Radius menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch Passwords menu or you can use a remote access authentication server based on the RADIUS protocol Radius menu After you set up user names and passwords on the RADIUS server you can use IEEE 802 1x port authentication to control access to specific ports dot1X menu Configuring the Logon Password 3 28 The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place If for some reason your password is lost you can delete all the user defined configuration files to restore the factory defaults and the default password as described in Upgrading Firmware via the Serial Port on page B 1 USER AUTHENTICATION The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Note that user Pp names can only be assigned via the CLI Command Attributes User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number
53. 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the ES 3626G is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address 2 6 You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network BASIC CONFIGURATION Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment if routing is not enabled on this switch Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will n
54. 3 237 4 309 port authentication 3 32 4 66 port priority configuring 3 120 4 181 INDEX default ingress 3 120 4 182 STA 3 97 4 155 port statistics 3 71 4 129 ports autonegotiation 3 67 4 121 broadcast storm threshold 3 69 4 126 capabilities 3 67 4 122 duplex mode 3 67 4 120 flow control 3 67 4 124 speed 3 67 4 120 ports configuring 3 63 4 118 ports mirroring 3 70 4 133 priority default port ingress 3 120 4 182 problems troubleshooting A 1 protocol migration 3 101 4 159 proxy ARP 3 158 4 224 Q queue weights 3 124 4 183 R RADIUS logon authentication 3 30 4 61 rate limits setting 3 77 4 135 restarting the system 3 28 4 28 RIP configuring 3 175 4 231 4 242 description 3 153 global settings 3 176 4 231 4 232 interface protocol settings 3 179 4 233 4 241 specifying interfaces 3 178 4 233 statistics 3 183 4 243 routing table displaying 3 173 4 228 RSTP 3 87 4 148 global configuration 3 89 4 148 Index 3 INDEX S serial port configuring 4 13 XModem downloads B 1 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 50 community string 3 50 4 90 enabling traps 3 51 4 94 trap manager 3 51 4 93 software displaying version 3 14 4 52 downloading 3 22 4 53 B 1 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA STA 3 87 4 146 edge port 3 97 3 101 4 156 global settings configuring 3 92 4 147 4 153 global settings displaying 3 89 4 160 interface settings 3 95 4 154 4 159 4 160
55. AE e Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must use a direct console connection and access FLASH FILE COMMANDS the download menu during a boot up to download the Boot ROM or diagnostic image See Upgrading Firmware via the Serial Port on page B 1 for more details Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Sour
56. ARP cache Use the no form to remove an entry from the cache Syntax arp ip address hardware address no arp p address ip address IP address to map to a specified hardware address hardware address Hardware address to map to a specified IP address The format for this address is xx XX XX XX XX XX Default Setting No default entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The ARP cache is used to map 32 bit IP addresses into 48 bit hardware i e Media Access Control addresses This cache includes entries for hosts and other routers on local network interfaces defined on this router The maximum number of static entries allowed in the ARP cache is 128 You may need to enter a static entry in the cache if there is no response to an ARP broadcast message For example some applications may not respond to ARP requests or the response arrives too late causing network operations to time out Example Console config arp 10 1 0 19 01 02 03 04 05 06 Console config Related Commands clear arp cache show arp 4 222 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS atp timeout Use this command to set the aging time for dynamic entries in the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache Use the no form to restore the default Syntax atp timeout seconds no arp timeout seconds The time a dynamic entry remains in the ARP cache Range 300 86400 86400 is one day Default Setting 1200 seconds 20 mi
57. CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE PERFORMANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF SMC OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE TAKEN TO AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS SMC will provide warranty service for one year following discontinuance from the active SMC price list Under the limited lifetime warranty internal and external power supplies fans and cables are covered by a standard one year warranty from date of purchase SMC Networks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 CONTENTS IOTTO CHO IA AAA RARAS 1 1 Key Features rte a O a o wees 1 1 Description of Software Features 2 6 0 0c eee eee 1 2 System Defaults iia ted dese eee dees SE ok ee aes 1 8 Initial Configuration ooooooomoomo eee eee 2 1 Connecting to the Switch sess sessy cee eee raro ee eevee ences 2 1 Configuration Options 2 6 66 eee eens 2 1 Required Connections orea sinri sista beac erase ence 2 2 Remote Connections sessies erep oie es is eee abe bes 2 4 Basic Configutation oo esis groar rrtt utupa cab ean eed bes 2 5 Console Connection sess sees ares ates aa seate
58. Chart Action Cannot connect using Telnet Web browser or SNMP software Be sure you have configured the agent with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway If you are trying to connect to the agent via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station must include the appropriate tag in its transmitted frames Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Check network cabling between the management station and the switch If you cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and 9600 bps Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in Appendix B Forgot or lost the password Reinstall the switch defaults Make a direct connection to the switch s console port and power cycle the switch Immediately after powering on press lt Ctrl gt lt u gt to access the system file menu Select lt D gt to delete all user defined configuration files Press lt Q gt to boot the switch A 1 TROUBLESHOOTING A 2 APPENDIX B UPGRADING FIRMWARE VIA THE SERIAL PORT B 1 The swi
59. Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC 3 41 addresses ACL Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 49 Basic Configuration Displaying System Information 3 12 You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem Location Specifies the system location Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows TCP port number used by the Web interface POST result Shows results of the power on self test Web See Setting the IP Address on page 3 9 Web Click System System Information Specify the system name BASIC CONFIGURATION location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet TigerSwitch 10 100 Managed 24 2 Standalone L3 Switch Manager System Name Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 29 Location Contact System Up Time 0 days O hours 2 minutes and 10 63 seconds Connect
60. Console Related Commands permit deny 4 78 4 79 ip access group 4 81 4 83 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE MAC ACLs Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration GC 4 84 mode permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source MAC 4 85 and destination address packet format and ACL Ethernet type mac access group Adds a port toa MAC ACL IC 4 87 show mac Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 87 access group show mac Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4 88 access list access list mac 4 84 Use this command to add a MAC access list and enter MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax access list mac ac _name no access list mac ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An ACL can contain either all permit commands or all deny commands When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a tule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access li
61. Console config queue cos map 3 6 7 Console config exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 4 186 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Traffic class Console Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3 124 This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 122 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes WRR Setting Table Displays a list of weights for each traffic class ie queue e Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 255 CLI shows Queue ID CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select a traffic class 1 e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Traffic Class 0 weight 1 Traffic Class 1 weight 4 WRR Setting Table Traffic C
62. Displays the default gateway configured for PE 4 219 this device ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another NE 4 220 node on the network PE 4 215 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip address Use this command to set the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp secondary no ip address ip address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP secondary Specifies a secondary IP address Default Setting IP address 0 0 0 0 Netmask 255 0 0 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage If this router is directly connected to end node devices or connected to end nodes via shared media that will be assigned to a specific subnet then you must create a router interface for each VLAN that will support routing The router interface consists of an IP address and subnet mask This interface address defines both the network number to which the router interface is attached and the router s host number on that network In other words a router interface address defines the network and subnetwork numbers of the segment that is connected to that interface and allows you to send IP packets to o
63. Eth 1 11 Static 3 140 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router MULTICAST FILTERING Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Vian1 Unit Port11 Interface Port lt lt Add VLAN ID 1 y Remove Port 13 Trunk CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config tip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter e
64. Example Console config ip routing Console config IP ROUTING COMMANDS ip route Use this command to configure static routes Use the no form to remove static routes Syntax ip route destination ip netmask default gateway metric metric no ip route destination ip netmask default e destination ip IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets e default Sets this entry as the default route e gateway IP address of the gateway used for this route metric Selected RIP cost for this interface Range 1 5 default 1 e Removes all static routing table entries Default Setting No static routes are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can configure up to 2000 static routes e Static routes take precedence over dynamically learned routes e Static routes are included in RIP updates periodically sent by the router Example This example forwards all traffic for subnet 192 168 1 0 to the router 192 168 5 254 using the default metric of 1 Console config tip route 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 5 254 Console config 4 227 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear ip route Use this command to remove dynamically learned entries from the IP routing table Syntax clear ip ro
65. Exec Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS aa aaa a a ar YHDOBWNHEO YHAOBWNEO Eth 1 Console Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 189 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 189 4 194 PRIORITY COMMANDS show map ip dscp Use this command to show the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 0 Eth 1 2 0 Eth 1 3 0 Eth 1 61 0 Eth 1 62 0 Eth 1 63 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 191 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 191 4 195 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note that IGMP query can be enabled globally at
66. FILTERING COMMANDS Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 198 IGMP Commands Layer 3 Command Function Mode Page ip igmp Enables IGMP for the specified interface IC 4 206 ip igmp robustval Configures the expected packet loss IC 4 207 ip igmp Configures frequency for sending host IC 4 207 query interval query messages ip igmp Configures the maximum host response IC 4 208 max resp interval time ip igmp Configures frequency for sending IC 4 209 last memb query group specific host query messages interval ip igmp version Configures IGMP version used on this IC 4 210 interface show ip igmp Displays the IGMP configuration for NE 4 211 interface specified interfaces PE clear ip igmp group Deletes entries from the IGMP cache PE 4 212 show ip igmp groups Displays detailed information for IGMP NE 4 213 groups PE 4 205 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp Use this command to enable IGMP on a VLAN interface Use the no form of this command to disable IGMP on the specified interface Syntax ip igmp no ip igmp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Co
67. Firmware Manages code image files 3 22 Configuration Manages switch configuration files 3 23 Reset Restarts the switch 3 28 Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters enables 3 16 GVRP VLAN registration protocol Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware 3 14 version numbers and power status Port 3 63 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 63 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 63 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 67 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 67 Port Broadcast Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3 69 Control Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 70 Address Table 3 84 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 3 84 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address 3 85 Table Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 87 3 5 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 6 Menu Description Page Spanning Tree 3 87 STA Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 89 STA Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA 3 92 STA Port Information Configures individual port settings for STA 3 95 STA Trunk Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 95 Information STA Port Configures individual port settings for STA 3 99 Configuration STA Trunk Con
68. IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration Use this command to set IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence p precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 4 189 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping IP Precedence Value CoS Value 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues e This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if 4 190 PRIORITY COMMANDS map ip dscp Global Configuration Use this command to enable IP DSCP
69. Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission PRIORITY COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 queue bandwidth Use this command to assign weighted round robin WRR weights to the four class of service CoS
70. Interface Port y VANID fz lt lt Add ir Multicast emove Port 13 Trunk Kn 3 143 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 197 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 200 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console Layer 3 IGMP Query used with Multicast Routing 3 144 IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping is a Layer 2 function page 3 137 that can be used to provide multicast filtering when no other switches in the network support multicast routing Note that IGMP Snooping can only be globally enabled IGMP Query Multicast query is used to poll each known multicast group for active members and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Although the implementation differs slightly IGMP Query is used in conjunction with both Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and multicast routing Note that when using IGMP Snooping multicast query is automatically enabled See Configuring IGMP Snooping Parameters on page 3 137 Layer 3 IGMP This protocol includes a form of multicast query specifically designed to work with multicast routing A router L3 network core ae ai multicast routing y
71. LH 1000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmettic flow control disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Proregtion Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Status Enabled Protocol Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Disabled Port Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames Egress Mode GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Ingress Port Priority 0 Prioritization Weighted Round Robin Class 0 1 Class 1 4 Class 2 16 Class 3 64 1 10 SYSTEM DEFAULTS Function Parameter Default IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Port Priority Disabled IP Settings Management VLAN Any VLAN configured with an IP address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Disabled Relay Disabled Server Disabled BOOTP Disabled ARP Enabled Cache Timeout 20 minutes Proxy Disabled Unicast Routing RIP Disabled OSPF Disabled Multicast IGMP Snooping Layer 2 Snooping Enabled Filtering Querier Disabled I
72. LSAs LS Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA Length The length of the LSA in bytes Router Role Description of router type including None AS Boundary Router Area Border Router or Virtual Link Number of Links Number of links described by the LSA 4 279 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 280 Field Description Link ID Link type and corresponding Router ID or network address Link Data e Router ID for transit network e Network s IP address mask for stub network e Neighbor Router ID for virtual link Link Type Link state type including transit network stub network or virtual link Number of TOS Type of Service metric This router only supports TOS 0 mettics or normal service Metrics Cost of the link The following shows output when using the summary keyword Console show ip ospf database summary OSPF Router with id 10 1 1 253 Displaying Summary Net Link States Area 10 1 0 0 Link State Data Summary Type 3 LS age 686 Options Support External routing capability LS Type Summary Links Network Link State ID 10 2 6 0 The destination Summary Network Number Advertising Router 10 1 1 252 LS Sequence Number 80000003 LS Checksum 0x3D02 Length 28 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Metric 1 Console Field Description OSPF Router id Router ID LS age Age of LSA in seconds Options Optional capabilities associated w
73. LSAs Type 5 which ate propagated into other areas within the AS default external route for another routing domain 5 lt Y 7 backbone ABR NSSA ASBR Router default external route for local AS external network AS e Routes that can be advertised with NSSA external LSAs include network destinations outside the AS learned via OSPF the default route static routes routes derived from other routing protocols such as RIP or directly connected networks that are not running OSPF e Also note that unlike stub areas all Type 3 summary LSAs are always imported into NSSAs to ensure that internal routes are always chosen over Type 7 NSSA external routes Default Cost This specifies a cost for the default summary route sent into a stub or not so stubby area NSSA from an Area Border Router ABR 3 193 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Usage e Before you create a stub or NSSA first specify the address range for an area using the Network Area Address Configuration screen page 3 206 e Stubs and NSSAs cannot be used as a transit area and should therefore be placed at the edge of the routing domain e A stub or NSSA can have multiple ABRs or exit points However all of the exit points and local routers must contain the same external routing data so that the exit point does not need to be determined for each external destination Command Attributes e Area I
74. Layer 2 or enabled for specific VLAN interfaces at Layer 3 Layer 2 query is disabled if Layer 3 query is enabled Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or 4 196 static assignment sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast 4 201 Layer 2 filtering at Layer 2 IGMP Layer 3 Configures the IGMP protocol used with multicast 4 205 routing IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 197 ip igmp snooping Adds an interface as a member of a GC 4 197 vlan static multicast group ip igmp snooping Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 198 version show ip igmp Shows the IGMP snooping and query PE 4 199 snooping configuration show Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast PE 4 200 mac address table list multicast 4 196 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping Use this command to enable IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static
75. Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state e The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the 4 16 LINE COMMANDS configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 15 password thresh 4 18 exec timeout Use this command to set the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e Ifuser input is detected within the timeout interv
76. Network and Type 4 AS Summary LSAs Self Originate Shows LSAs originated by this router LS Type LSA Type Options Type 1 5 7 See the preceding description IP ROUTING e Adv Router IP address of the advertising router If not entered information about all advertising routers is displayed e Age Age of LSA in seconds Seq Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate LSAs e CheckSum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA These items are read only Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Link State Database Information Specify parameters for the LSAs you want to display then click Query Link State Database Information Query by F Area ID 0 000 F LS Type Type 1 RouterLink Link ID F ADV Router F Self Originate 10 2 0 1 Query Query By none Search Results 22 results Total Type 1 Route ink 1 Type 2 NetworkLink 2 Type 3 SummaryLink 3 Type 4 asSummaryLink 4 Type 5 asExternallink 5 Type 7 NSSAExternalLink 7 Link State Data Router Type 1 ArealD LinkID ADV Router Age Seq CheckSum 0001 10245188 10 244 50 1002 0x80000016 OxDCB7 CLI The CLI provides a wider selection of display options for viewing the Link State Database See show ip ospf database on page 273 3 215 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Information on Border Routers You can display entries in the local routing table for Area Border Routers ABR an
77. OSPF GC 4 246 router id Sets the router ID for this device RC 4 247 compatible rfc1583 Calculates summary route costs using RFC RC 4 248 1583 OSPFv1 default Generates a default external route into an RC 4 248 information autonomous system originate timers spf Configures the hold time between consecutive RC 4 250 SPF calculations Route Metrics and Summaries area range Summarizes routes advertised by an ABR RC 4 251 area default cost Sets the cost for a default summary route sent RC 4 252 into a stub or NSSA summary address Summarizes routes advertised by an ASBR RC 4 253 redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to RC 4 254 another Area Configuration network area Assigns specified interface to an area RC 4 255 area stub Defines a stubby area that cannot send or RC 4 257 receive LSAs area nssa Defines a not so stubby that can import RC 4 258 external routes area virtual link Defines a virtual link from an atea border RC 4 260 routers to the backbone IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Function Mode Page Interface Configuration ip ospf Specifies the authentication type for an IC 4 263 authentication interface ip ospf Assigns a simple password to be used by IC 4 264 authentication key neighboring routers ip ospf Enables MD5 authentication and sets the key IC 4 265 message digest key for an interface ip ospf cost Specifie
78. Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3 Max Graft Retries Configures the maximum number of times to resend a graft message if it has not been acknowledged Range 1 65535 Default 2 MULTICAST ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol PIM DM Interface Settings Select a VLAN enable or disable PIM DM for the selected interface modify any of the protocol parameters as required and click Apply PIM DM Interface Settings VLAN f2 gt PIM DM Protocol Status Enabled Hello Interval seconds Bo Hello Holdtime seconds 105 Trigger Hello Interval seconds Bo Join Prune Holdtime seconds Rio Graft Retry Interval seconds BO Max Graft Retries CLI This example sets the PIM DM protocol parameters for VLAN 2 and displays the current settings Console config interface vlan 2 4 165 Console config if ip pim dense mode 4 303 Console config 1f tip pim hello interval 60 4 304 Console config if ip pim hello holdtime 210 4 305 Console config if ip pim trigger hello interval 10 4 305 Console config if ip pim join prune holdtime 60 4 306 Console config 1f tip pim graft retry interval 9 4 307 Console config 1f tip pim max graft retries 5 4 308 Console config if end Console show ip pim interface 2 4 309 Vlan 2 is up PIM is enabled mode is Dense Internet address is 10 1 1 253 Hello time interval is 60 sec trigger hello time interval is 10 sec Hello holdtime is 210 sec Join Prune hold
79. Routing Configures static and dynamic unicast routing 4 225 Multicast Routing Configures multicast routing protocols DVMRP and 4 285 PIM DM The access mode s hown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations NE Normal Exec IC Interface Configuration PE Privileged Exec LC Line Configuration GC Global Configuration RC Router Configuration ACL Access Control List Config WC VLAN Database Configuration DC DHCP Server Configuration LINE COMMANDS Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands ate used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and GC 4 14 starts the line configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 15 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 16 exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter LC 4 17 waits until user input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which LC 4 18 limits the number of failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console LC 4 19 is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data
80. Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Layer 3 Network layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This layer handles the routing functions for data moving from one open system to another Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Glossary 4 GLOSSARY Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate i
81. Status Enables or disables the IP port priority Interface Selects the port or trunk interface to which the settings apply IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP Port Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Status IP Port Priority Global Status Disabled 3 131 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 132 Click Priority IP Port Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Add IP Port IP Port Priority Interface G Port X C Trun Z Select none IP Port Priority Table IP Port Number TCP UDP 80 Class of Service Value 0 oz Remove IP Port Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 1 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings Console config map ip port 4 187 Console config
82. VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add v an ist tagged untagged remove v an list no switchport allowed vlan add v an list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged Ifa trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member e Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface 4 170 VLAN COMMANDS Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list
83. a datagram and when the gateway can direct the host to send traffic on a shorter route ICMP is also used by routers to feed back information about more suitable routes 1 e the next hop router to use for a specific destination Statistical Values Parameter Description Messages The total number of ICMP messages which the entity received sent Errors The number of ICMP messages which the entity received sent but determined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length etc Destination The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable Unreachable messages received sent Time Exceeded The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received sent Parameter Problems The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received sent Source Quenches The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received sent Redirects The number of ICMP Redirect messages received sent Echos The number of ICMP Echo request messages received sent Echo Replies The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received sent Timestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received sent IP ROUTING Parameter Description Timestamp Replies The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received sent Address Masks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received sent Address Mask Replies The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received sen
84. a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Port based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering and routing provide support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access v a the console port Telnet or Web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server 1 e RADIUS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1x protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request a user name and password from the 802 1x client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server 1 e RADIUS server Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering
85. aa Bae 4 51 SHOW USELS ote eis Lido Mee SES i ene eae ene te Be 4 51 show Version os sealed kee he ee te a ls 4 52 Flash File Commands 0 00 c cece cece eee cece encase 4 53 COPY A a E eA At eee tat 4 53 delta ln ill ithe toll ahaa ils el tithe 4 56 Git contre tetas seat RS DA 4 57 Which bOOotr Assis o E Seah Gaal ad a i 4 58 DOORS YEMA Feta aks Ae ashes dos aan ease es 4 59 Authentication Commands 00000 4 60 Authentication Sequence 1 6 eee eee 4 60 authentication load oe lads hia oe elas Pes oe 4 60 RADIUS Client ran fiche tees et jose das thes avs be 4 61 radius server host siga teeda a E AAE ee eee 4 62 tadius setver POLL 2 r A A Aa eee eee 4 63 radius seryer KEY aiey a A A AAE 4 63 radius server retransmit 6 eee eee nooo 4 64 xiii CONTENTS radius server timeout 1 1 6 eee 4 65 show tadius servert 6 6 cic cee eee 4 65 802 1x Port Authentication 0 6 eee ee eee 4 66 authentication dotlx default ooooooooommm o roo 4 67 dotixideta ale tar ia 4 67 doil mitre a alas Edi 4 68 dotlx port control 6 eee eee 4 68 dotlx re authenticate 2 0 eee eee 4 69 dotlx re authentication 06 eee eee 4 69 dotlx timeout quiet petiod 6 6 eee eee 4 70 dotlx timeout re authperiod 0 0 0 4 70 dotlx timeout tx petiod 6 eee eee 4 71 show dok ia ais A 4 72 Access Control List Commands 0 6 0000 c cee eee eens 4 74 TP ACS nit iS t
86. acquired Poision Reverse This method propagates routes back to an interface port from which they have been acquired but set the distance vector metrics to infinity This provides faster convergence Authentication Type Specifies whether or not authentication is required for exchanging protocol messages Default No Authentication No Authentication No authentication is required Simple Password Requires the interface to exchange routing information with other routers based on an authorized password Note that authentication only applies to RIPv2 e Authentication Key Specifies the key to use for authenticating RIPv2 packets For authentication to function properly both the sending and receiving interface must use the same password Range 1 16 characters case sensitive IP ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol RIP Interface Settings Select the RIP protocol message types that will be received and sent the method used to provide faster convergence and prevent loopback i e prevent instability in the network topology and the authentication option and corresponding password Then click Apply Interface Settings VLAN Mz Receive Version RIPVI or RIPV2 y Send Version RIPVI Compatible Instability Preventing SplitHorizon y Authentication Type SimplePassword Authentication Key mighty CLI This example sets the receive version to accept both RIPv1 or RIPv2 messages the se
87. address Syntax hardware address hardware address type no hardware address hardware address Specifies the MAC address of the client device type Indicates the following protocol used on the client device ethernet ieee802 fddi Default Setting If no type is specified the default protocol is Ethernet Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration 4 115 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear 4 116 Command Usage This command identifies a DHCP or BOOTP client to bind to an address specified in the host command BOOTP clients cannot transmit a client identifier To bind an address to a BOOTP client you must associate a hardware address with the host entry Example Console config dhcp hardware address 00 e0 29 94 34 28 ethernet Console config dhcp Related Commands host 4 113 ip dhcp binding Use this command to delete an automatic address binding from the DHCP server database Syntax clear ip dhcp binding address address The address of the binding to clear e Clears all automatic bindings Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Usage Guidelines e An address specifies the client s IP address If an asterisk is used as the address parameter the DHCP server clears all automatic bindings Use the no host command to delete a manual binding e This command is normally used after modifying the address pool or after moving DHCP service to another de
88. address field and send the message back to the source hardware address When the source device receives a reply it writes the destination IP address and corresponding MAC address into its cache and forwards the IP traffic on to the next hop As long as this entry has not timed out the router will be able forward traffic directly to the next hop for this destination without having to broadcast another ARP request Proxy ARP When a node in the attached subnetwork does not have routing or a default gateway configured Proxy ARP can be used to forward ARP requests to a remote subnetwork When the router receives an ARP request for a remote network and Proxy ARP is enabled it determines if it has the best route to the remote network and then answers the ARP IP ROUTING request by sending its own MAC address to the requesting node That node then sends traffic to the router which in turn uses its own routing table to forward the traffic to the remote destination A EM AR a request no routing no default gateway Proxy ARP A AAA PAE aes Talara E Remote ARP Server Basic ARP Configuration You can use the ARP General configuration menu to specify the timeout for ARP cache entries or to enable Proxy ARP for specific VLAN interfaces Command Usage The aging time determines how long dynamic entries remain the cache If the timeout is too short the router may tie
89. be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config mac address table dynamic Use this command to remove any learned entries from the forwarding database and to clear the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic Console show mac address table Use this command to view classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan v an id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 4 vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 143 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be
90. both static and dynamic routing Static routing requires routing information to be stored in the switch either manually or when a connection is set up by an application outside the switch IP ROUTING Dynamic routing uses a routing protocol to exchange routing information calculate routing tables and respond to changes in the status or loading of the network The switch supports RIP RIP 2 and OSPFv2 dynamic routing protocols RIP and RIP 2 Dynamic Routing Protocols The RIP protocol is the most widely used routing protocol RIP uses a distance vector based approach to routing Routes are determined on the basis of minimizing the distance vector or hop count which serves as a rough estimate of transmission cost Each router broadcasts its advertisement every 30 seconds together with any updates to its routing table This allows all routers on the network to learn consistent tables of next hop links which lead to relevant subnets OSPF v2 Dynamic Routing Protocol OSPF overcomes all the problems of RIP It uses a link state routing protocol to generate a shortest path tree then builds up its routing table based on this tree OSPF produces a more stable network because the participating routers act on network changes predictably and simultaneously converging on the best route more quickly than RIP Moreover when several equal cost routes to a destination exist traffic can be distributed equally among them Non IP Protocol Rout
91. broadcasts an ARP packet to all the ports on the destination VLAN to find out the destination MAC address After the MAC address is discovered the packet is reformatted and sent out to the destination The reformat process includes decreasing the Time To Live TTI field of the IP header recalculating the IP header checksum and replacing the destination MAC address with either the MAC address of the destination node or that of the next hop router When another packet destined to the same node arrives the destination MAC can be retrieved directly from the Layer 3 address table the packet is then reformatted and sent out the destination port IP switching can be done at wire speed when the destination address entry is already in the Layer 3 address table If the switch determines that a frame must be routed the route is calculated only during setup Once the route has been determined all packets in the current flow are simply switched or forwarded across the chosen path This takes advantage of the high throughput and low latency of switching by enabling the traffic to bypass the routing engine once the path calculation has been performed Routing Path Management Routing Path Management involves the determination and updating of all the routing information required for packet forwarding including e Handling routing protocols e Updating the routing table Updating the Layer 3 switching database Routing Protocols The switch supports
92. can manage the router via any of these IP addresses 2 Before you can change the primary IP address on an interface you must first clear the current address with the no form of this command Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart client 4 98 4 217 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip default gateway 4 218 Use this command to a establish a static route between this router and devices that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The gateway specified in this command is only valid if routing is disabled with the no ip routing command If IP routing is disabled you must define a gateway if the target device is located in a different subnet If routing is enabled you must define the gateway with the ip route command Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 219 ip routing 4 226 ip route 4 227 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS show
93. class of service value IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point 3 129 priority mapping a DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 131 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the socket 3 131 number and associated class of service value Copy Settings Copies port priority settings from source port to 3 131 target port Trunk 3 79 LACP Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 80 Trunk Configuration Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 82 SNMP Configures community strings and related trap 3 50 functions IGMP Snooping 3 134 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures 3 137 parameters for multicast query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a 3 139 Port Information neighboring multicast router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring 3 140 Port Configuration multicast router IP Multicast Displays all multicast groups active on this 3 142 Registration Table switch including multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Indicates multicast addresses associated with the 3 143 Port Table selected VLAN 3 7 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 8 Menu Description Page Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3 71 Rate Limit 3 77 Input Rate Lim
94. classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Queue 0 2 3 0 1 2 4 6 q Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 184 PRIORITY COMMANDS Command Usage CoS assigned at the ingress port is used to select a CoS priority at the egress port Example The following example shows how to map CoS values 0 1 and 2 to priority queue 0 value 3 to queue 1 values 4 and 5 to queue 2 and values 6 and 7 to queue 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 172 Console config if queue cos map 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 Console config if queue cos map 3 Console config if aR WO Related Commands show queue cos map 4 186 show queue bandwidth Use this command to display the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the four priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Queue ID Weight Console 4 185 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show queue cos map Use this command to show the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 D
95. config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf message digest key 1 md5 aiebel Console config if 4 265 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands ip ospf authentication 4 263 ip ospf cost Use this command to explicitly set the cost of sending a packet on an interface Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip ospf cost cost no ip ospf cost cost Link metric for this interface Use higher values to indicate slower ports Range 1 65535 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting 1 Command Usage Interface cost reflects the port speed This router uses a default cost of 1 for all ports Therefore if you install a Gigabit module you may have to reset the cost for all of the 100 Mbps ports to a value greater than 1 Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if tip ospf cost 10 Console config if 4 266 IP ROUTING COMMANDS ip ospf dead interval Use this command to set the interval at which hello packets are not seen before neighbors declare the router down Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip ospf dead interval seconds no ip ospf dead interval seconds The maximum time that neighbor routers can wait for a hello packet before declaring the transmitting router down This interval must be set to the same value for all routers on the network Range 1 65535 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN
96. config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 125 4 165 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport mode Use this command to configure the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN e associated with the PVID are sent untagged hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if fswitchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 4 167 4 166 VLAN COMMANDS switchport acceptable frame types Use this command to configure the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable
97. config router tarea 10 4 0 0 virtual 1 e config router 255 0 0 area 10 4 0 0 ink 10 4 3 254 This example creates a virtual link using MD5 authentication Conso Conso Conso e config router network 10 4 0 0 0 255 e config router tarea 10 4 0 0 virtual 1 message digest key 5 md5 1d83jdpq e config router 255 0 0 area 10 4 0 0 ink 10 4 3 254 Related Commands show ip ospf virtual links 4 284 IP ROUTING COMMANDS ip ospf authentication p osp Use this command to specify the authentication type used for an interface Enter this command without any optional parameters to specify plain text or simple password authentication Use the no form to restore the default of no authentication Syntax ip ospf authentication message digest null no ip ospf authentication message digest Specifies message digest MD5 authentication e null Indicates that no authentication is used Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting No authentication Command Usage e Before specifying plain text password authentication for an interface configure a password with the ip ospf authentication key command Before specifying MD5 authentication for an interface configure the message digest key id and key with the ip ospf message digest key command The plain text authentication key or the MD5 key id and key must be used consistently throughout the autonomous system Examp
98. delay between 0 and the trigger hello interval Example Console config if ip pim triggerr hello interval 10 Console config if ip pim join prune holdtime Use this command to configure of the hold time for the prune state Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip pim join prune holdtime seconds no ip pim join prune holdtime seconds The hold time for the prune state Range 0 65535 Default Setting 210 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN 4 306 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Command Usage The multicast interface that first receives a multicast stream from a particular source forwards this traffic to all other PIM interfaces on the router If there are no requesting groups on that interface the leaf node sends a prune message upstream and enters a prune state for this multicast stream The prune state is maintained until the join prune holdtime timer expires or a graft message is received for the forwarding entry Example Console config if ip pim join prune holdtime 60 Console config if ip pim graft retry interval Use this command to configure the time to wait for a Graft acknowledgement before resending a Graft Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip pim graft retry interval seconds no ip pim graft retry interval seconds The time before resending a Graft Range 0 65535 Default Setting 3 seconds Command Mode Interface Confi
99. deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC addtess Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0 means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 e0 29 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Console mac address table aging time 4 144 Use this command to set the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Time in number of seconds 10 1000000 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time Use this command to show the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console 4 145 COMMAND LINE I
100. depends on the setting specified with the version command Global RIPv1 Routes broadcast to other routers with RIPv2 Global RIPv2 RIPv2 packets Command Usage e Use this command to override the global setting specified by the RIP version command e You can specify the receive version based on these options Use none to passively monitor route information advertised by other routers attached to the network Use 1 or 2 if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or RIPv2 respectively Use v2 broadcast to propagate route information by broadcasting to other routers on the network using RIPv2 instead of multicasting as normally required by RIPv2 Using this mode allows RIPv1 routers to receive these protocol messages but still allows RIPv2 routers to receive the additional information provided by RIPv2 including subnet mask next hop and authentication information Example This example sets the interface version for VLAN 1 to send RIPv1 packets Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip rip send version 1 Console config if Related Commands version 4 235 4 238 IP ROUTING COMMANDS ip split horizon Use this command to enable split horizon or poison reverse a variation on an interface Use the no form to disable split horizon Syntax ip split horizon poison reverse no ip split horizon poison reverse Enables poison reverse on the current int
101. eee eee 4 186 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 1 0 0 ee eee 4 187 map ip port Global Configuration o o oooooooo 4 187 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 188 map ip precedence Global Configuration 4 189 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 189 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 191 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 191 show map ip port i e scala teas A eden rd 4 193 show map ip precedence 6 6 cee eee eee 4 194 show map ip dscp 1 6 6 ccc eee ee eens 4 195 Multicast Filtering Commands 1 00 0 00 cee eee eee 4 196 IGMP Snooping Commands 6 6 0 6 eee eee 4 196 xvil CONTENTS IP BMP SHOOPING tia ee a a 4 197 ip igmp snooping vlan static o o oooooomocccmoooo 4 197 ip igmp snooping version 6 6 eee eee 4 198 show ip igmp snooping 6 4 199 show mac address table multicast o o o 4 200 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee 4 201 ip igmp snooping quetier 6 6 6 eee eee 4 201 ip igmp snooping query COUNt 0 00 00 ooo 4 202 ip igmp snooping query interval ooooomo oooo o 4 203 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 203 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 204 IGMP Commands Layer 3 2 eee eee eee 4 205 IPH EMP a 4 206 Ip igmip tobustval jas sad etalk leks tated AA areas la 4 207 ip igmp query
102. es 4 271 show ip ospf border routers 0 eee 4 272 show ip ospf database 1 1 0 0 cece eee eee ee 4 273 show ip ospf interface 6 ee eee eee 4 281 show ip ospf neighbor 0 eee eee eee 4 282 show ip ospf summary address 00000000 4 283 show ip ospf virtual links ooooommmcm oomo o 4 284 Multicast Routing Commands 0 006 4 285 Static Multicast Routing Commands 00005 4 285 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter oooooocccocoooo 4 286 show ip igmp snooping mrouter oooooomoooo o 4 287 General Multicast Routing Commands 4 287 ip multicast routing 6 6 eee eee 4 288 A A Gea A ki ea 4 288 DVMRP Multicast Routing Commands 4 4 290 fOUteT dyr iia ec lay da aad dt 2s 4 291 probesinterval ioc toa ee eae eee E 4 292 HDMI ii haa des Aw test wade Ba 4 293 report interval oa eea teana eee eee 4 293 flash update interval 0 eee eee 4 294 Prune ltetime o Ae fee Ca hs oie EE 4 294 default gateway 6 eee ee eee 4 295 A 20 2 teh O A Sa tena 4 296 ip dyip METIC A440 dea aaa Aiea 4 297 Cleataip dvmtp route ios fick ede aun es Daa es 8 4 298 show router dvmrp 6 ee eee 4 298 show ip dvmrp route 6 eee ee 4 299 show ip dvmrp neighbor 0 6 00 cee eee 4 300 show ip dvmrp interface 6 eee eee eee 4 301 PIM DM Multicast Routing Commands 4 301 futet PUM A a arent ek ened ta Rade od Seed id 4 302 ip pi
103. external route is used to calculate the path cost for traffic passed from other routers within the AS out through the ASBR When you use this command to redistribute routes into a routing domain i e an Autonomous System this router automatically becomes an Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR However an ASBR does not by default generate a default route into the routing domain If you use the always keyword the router will advertise itself as a default external route into the AS even if a default external route does not actually exist To define a default route use the ip route command If you do not use the always keyword the router can only advertise a default external route into the AS if the redistribute command is used to import external routes via RIP or static routing and such a route is known Type 1 route advertisements add the internal cost to the external route metric Type 2 routes do not add the internal cost metric When comparing Type 2 routes the internal cost is only used as a tie breaker if several Type 2 routes have the same cost Example This example assigns a metric of 20 to the default external route advertised into an autonomous system sending it as a Type 2 external metric Console config router default information originate metric 20 metric type 2 Console config router Related Commands ip route 4 227 redistribute 4 254 4 249 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE tim
104. fill in the parameters for RADIUS authentication if selected and click Apply Radius Settings Authentication Local Server IP Address fisz168125 Server Port Number haz Secret Text String pe OOOO Number of Server Transmits Bo Timeout for a reply sec ro CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 4 60 Console config radius server host 192 168 1 25 4 62 Console config radius server port 181 4 63 Console config radius server key green 4 63 Console config radius server retransmit 5 4 64 Console config radius server timeout 10 4 65 Console show radius server 4 65 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with radius server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console config Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication 3 32 Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1x dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch USER AUTHENTICATION ports in a network can be centrally controlled
105. following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set the data rate to 9600 baud Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys Notes 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 13 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 11 2 3 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Remote Connections 2 4 Prior to accessing the swit
106. for each multicast group Interface The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor e Metric The metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors MULTICAST ROUTING Up time The time elapsed since this entry was created Expire The time remaining before this entry will be aged out Web Click Routing Protocol DVMRP DVMRP Routing Table DVMRP Routing Table Ip Address Netmask Upstream Neighbor Interface Metric Up time Expire 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 253 WLAN1 1 84279 0 10 110 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 253 VLAN2 1 84828 0 10 1 8 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 254 VLANI 2 19570 134 Entry Count 3 xl CLI This example displays known DVMRP routes Console show ip dvmrp route 4 299 Source Mask Upstream_nbr Interface Metric UpTime Expire 10 100 299220920940 10 1 0 253 vlanl 1 84438 0 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 253 vlan2 1 84987 0 10 180 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 254 vlanl 2 19729 97 Console Configuring PIM DM Protocol Independent Multicasting PIM provides two different modes of operation sparse mode and dense mode Sparse mode SM is designed for networks where the probability of multicast group members is low such as the Internet Dense mode DM on the other hand is designed for networks where the probability of multicast group members is high such as a local network PIM DM is a simple multicast routing protocol that uses flood a
107. from IGMP a router switch can determine which if any multicast traffic needs to be forwarded to each of its ports At Layer 3 multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet 3 135 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Note that IGMP neither alters nor routes IP multicast packets A multicast routing protocol must be used to deliver IP multicast packets across different subnetworks Therefore when DVMRP or PIM routing is enabled for a subnet on this switch you also need to enable IGMP vo L3 network core A L2 edge switches snooping and query L2 switch to end nodes snooping on IGMP clients _ a Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Quety 3 136 IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query page 3 137 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier 1 e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 140 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffi
108. from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication i Protocol over LANs ree EAPOL to exchange a DRAE AGAR authentication 1 Client attempts to access a switch port 2 Switch sends client an identity request protocol messages RADIUS 3 Client sends back identity information 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server server with the client and 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access rights When a client 1 e Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method can be MD
109. full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error 3 73 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 74 Parameter Description Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive A count of frames for which reception on a particular Errors interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets exclud
110. in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network oops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 3 100 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this o
111. interval 6 0 eee eee 4 207 ip igmp max resp interval 6 6 06 eee 4 208 ip igmp last memb query interval 00 4 209 PP ISIN Version penis A Rd de eS 4 210 show ip igmp interface 0 eee eee eee 4 211 cleatip ISP group o eee eta ya eas oe eS 4 212 show ip igmp groups 6 ee eee ee 4 213 TR Interface Commands s De A i n 4 215 Basic IP Configuration 6 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 4 215 ipaddresss sann Hut nh An a a Nas a ce as A 4 216 ip default gateway 2 0 cece eee 4 218 show ip interface brs sui espa ta AO aida 4 219 showip teditects fia aricaids Adi 4 219 MTL oi II ancien RP nize secede BE 4 220 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 004 4 221 ALD td Mie seh oh be ved eae Magee Coe eit 4 222 IPUR og ME MS Ss 4 223 Cleat arp cachen sr J eis cad heeded oe Sek AAG Oe tke Nd 4 223 SHOW AEP ai ad Anta Loe iA Ale eae 4 224 Ip proxy atp ae ta Md eae dad det car ed 4 224 IP Routing Commands sisena a e A cee eee 4 225 Global Routing Configuration o o oooooooccccocono 4 226 APE OUT area tthe aed tA a eG 4 226 xviii CONTENTS PIU a A 4 227 clear ip toute a ga daa 4 228 show prouts aa a A aad dated ae 4 228 SHOWAp trate messsage A eae ete 4 229 Routing Information Protocol RIP oo ooomo 4 231 FOULED MPs Vesa hele ce heehee A Bagel A ache hs ed 4 231 METS basic dd id 4 232 o A E E 4 233 AN 4 234 NOA A oh Spelt 1 Meee ee te SN eng A 4 235 ip rip receive VEFSION an
112. ip interface Use this command to display the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface Vlan 1 is up addressing mode is User Interface address is 10 1 0 254 mask is 255 255 255 0 Primary MTU is 1500 bytes Proxy ARP is disabled Split horizon is enabled Console Related Commands show ip redirects 4 219 show ip redirects Use this command to show the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 218 4 219 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ping 4 220 Use this command to send ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host count corn size size bost IP address or IP alias of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the router adds header information Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached Following are some results of the ping command Normal response The
113. ip ospf message digest key Use this command to enable message digest MD5 authentication on the specified interface and to assign a key id and key to be used by neighboring routers Use the no form to remove an existing key Syntax ip ospf message digest key key id md5 key no ip ospf message digest key key id key id Index number of an MD5 key Range 1 255 key Alphanumeric password used to generate a 128 bit message digest or fingerprint Range 1 16 characters Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting MD authentication is disabled Command Usage e Normally only one key is used per interface to generate authentication information for outbound packets and to authenticate incoming packets Neighbor routers must use the same key identifier and key value e When changing to a new key the router will send multiple copies of all protocol messages one with the old key and another with the new key Once all the neighboring routers start sending protocol messages back to this router with the new key the router will stop using the old key This rollover process gives the network administrator time to update all the routers on the network without affecting the network connectivity Once all the network routers have been updated with the new key the old key should be removed for security reasons Example This example sets a message digest key identifier and password Console
114. is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 47 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 48 Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by mode command and corresponding commands This command cy symbols and includes the configuration displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for VLANs Routing protocol configuration settings Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest enable password level 15 0 super 1 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS interface vlan 1 ip address 0 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 ip addres
115. link type 3 98 3 101 4 158 path cost 3 97 4 154 path cost method 3 94 4 152 port priority 3 97 4 155 protocol migration 3 101 4 159 transmission limit 3 94 4 153 startup files creating 3 24 4 53 displaying 3 22 4 47 setting 3 22 4 59 static addresses setting 3 84 4 141 static routes configuring 3 172 4 227 statistics ARP 3 164 4 229 ICMP 3 168 4 229 IP 3 165 4 229 port 3 71 4 129 RIP 3 183 4 243 Index 4 TCP 3 171 4 229 UDP 3 170 4 229 STP 3 92 4 148 STP Also see STA system clock setting 3 25 4 41 system software downloading from server 3 22 4 53 T time setting 3 25 4 41 traffic class weights 3 124 4 183 trap manager 2 11 3 51 4 93 troubleshooting A 1 trunk configuration 3 79 4 137 LACP 3 80 4 139 static 3 82 4 138 U upgrading software 3 22 4 53 B 1 user password 3 28 4 33 4 34 V VLANs 3 102 3 119 4 162 4 174 adding static members 3 111 3 113 4 170 creating 3 110 4 163 description 3 102 displaying basic information 3 107 4 176 displaying port members 3 108 4 172 egress mode 3 116 4 166 interface configuration 3 114 4 167 4 171 private 3 118 4 173 INDEX W menu list 3 5 panel display 3 4 Web interface access requirements 3 1 X configuration buttons 3 4 home page 3 3 XModem downloads B 1 Index 5 INDEX Index 6 FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALL From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week 800 SMC 4 YOU Phn 949 679 80
116. mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax map ip dscp no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config tmap ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration Use this command to set IP DSCP priority 1 e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dsep value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 255 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 4 191 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 STD my a WO NI O Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Pre
117. mode permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP STD 4 78 address ACL permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria EXT 4 79 including source and destination IP address ACL TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 81 show ip Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 81 access group show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 83 access list ip Use this command to add an IP access list and enter configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax access list ip standard extended ac _name no access list ip standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address 4 76 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An ACL can contain either all permit commands or all deny commands When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a tule u
118. name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 1 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC6724L3 1 Intelligent Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection 4 2 Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To access the switch through a Telnet
119. of routing information but does not produce unnecessary protocol traffic Note that this value should be larger for virtual links Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if tip ospf retransmit interval 7 Console config if ip ospf transmit delay 4 270 Use this command to set the estimated time to send a link state update packet over an interface Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip ospf transmit delay seconds no ip ospf transmit delay seconds Sets the estimated time required to send a link state update Range 1 65535 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting 1 second Command Usage LSAs have their age incremented by this delay before transmission When estimating the transmit delay consider both the transmission and propagation delays for an interface Set the transmit delay according to link speed using larger values for lower speed links The transmit delay must be the same for all routers attached to an autonomous system Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf transmit delay 6 Console config if show ip ospf TP ROUTING COMMANDS Use this command to show basic information about the routing configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ospf Area 0 0 0 0 BACKBONE Area 10 1 0 0 Routing Process with ID 10 1 1 253 Supports only single TOS TOSO
120. one or more previously transmitted octets Passive Opens The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN RCVD state from the LISTEN state Reset Connections The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE WAIT state 3 171 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click IP Statistics TCP TCP Statistics Segments Received 3406 Receive Errors 0 Segments Sent 4162 Segments Retransmitted O Active Opens 0 Passive Opens 418 Failed Connection Attempts 0 Reset Connections 2 Current Connections 1 CLI See the example on page 3 164 Configuring Static Routes 3 172 This router can dynamically configure routes to other network segments using dynamic routing protocols i e RIP or OSPF However you can also manually enter static routes in the routing table Static routes may be required to access network segments where dynamic routing is not supported or can be set to force the use of a specific route to a subnet rather than using dynamic routing Static routes do not automatically change in response to changes in network topology so you should only configure a small number of stable routes to ensure network accessibility Command Attributes Interface Index number of the IP interface IP Address IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host Ne
121. pim dense mode commands Example Console config ip multicast routing Console config show ip mroute Use this command to display the IP multicast routing table Syntax show ip mroute group address source summary e group address An IP multicast group address with subscribers directly attached or downstream from this router source The IP subnetwork at the root of the multicast delivery tree This subnetwork contains a known multicast source summary Displays summary information for each entry in the IP multicast routing table 4 288 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays information for multicast routing If no optional parameters are selected detailed information for each entry in the multicast address table is displayed If you select a multicast group and source pair detailed information is displayed only for the specified entry If the summary option is selected an abbreviated list of information for each entry is displayed on a single line Example This example shows detailed multicast information for a specified group soutce pair Console show ip mroute 224 0 255 3 192 111 46 8 IP Multicast Forwarding is enabled IP Multicast Routing Table Flags P Prune F Forwarding 192 111 46 0 255 255 255 0 224 0 255 3 Owner DVMPR Upstream Interface vlanl Upstream Router 148 122 34 9 Downstream vlan2 P vlan
122. pool or after moving DHCP service to another device Entry Count Number of hosts that have been given addresses by the switch Note More than one DHCP server may respond to a service request by a host In this case the host generally accepts the first address assigned by any DHCP server 3 62 PORT CONFIGURATION Web Click DHCP Server IP Binding You may use the Delete button to clear an address from the DHCP server s database IP Binding IP Address Mac Address Lease time Start time Delete 10 10 20 00 00 8 98 73 21 2147483647 63829031 Delete Entry Count 1 CLI This example displays the current binding and then clears all automatic binding Console show ip dhcp binding 4 117 IP MAC Lease Time Start 10 1 0 20 00 00 e8 98 73 21 86400 Dec 25 08 01 57 2002 Console clear ip dhcp binding 4 116 Console Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web e Name Interface label Type Indicates the port type 100BASE TX 1000BASE T 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 100BASE FX Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled e Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down 3 63 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 64 Speed Duplex Status Show
123. priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight weight4 The ratio of weights for queues O 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 255 Default Setting Weights 1 4 16 and 64 are assigned to queue 0 1 2 and 3 respectively Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example The following example shows how to assign WRR weights of 1 3 5 and 7 to the CoS priority queues 0 1 2 and 3 Console config queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 Console config Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 185 4 183 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE queue cos map Use this command to assign class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0 3 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos cos no queue cos map e queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 3 where 3 is the highest priority queue cos cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic
124. priority tags to the switch s priority queues Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3 120 You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic play J 28 CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Port Priorit
125. quiet period seconds seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx timeout quiet period 350 Console config dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds no dotlx timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 4 70 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dotlx timeout tx period seconds no dotlx timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx timeout tx period 300 Console config 4 71 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show dot1x 4 72 Use this command to show general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dotlx statistics interface nerface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command disp
126. rate clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 127 show interfaces Displays status for the specified interface NE 4 128 status PE show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE 4 129 counters PE show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational NE 4 131 switchport status of an interface PE 4 118 INTEREACE COMMANDS interface Use this command to configure an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 e vlan v an id Range 1 4094 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 25 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if description Use this command to add a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters 4 119 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 25 Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console c
127. server 1 ip dhcp restart relay Use this command to enable DHCP relay for the specified VLAN Use the no form to disable it Syntax ip dhep relay no ip dhcp relay 4 99 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage This command is used to configure DHCP relay functions for host devices attached to the switch If DHCP relay service is enabled and this switch sees a DHCP request broadcast it inserts its own IP address into the request so the DHCP server will know the subnet where the client is located Then the switch forwards the packet to the DHCP server on another network When the server receives the DHCP request it allocates a free IP address for the DHCP client from its defined scope for the DHCP client s subnet and sends a DHCP response back to the DHCP relay agent 1 e this switch This switch then broadcasts the DHCP response received from the server to the client Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip dhcp relay Console config if end Console show ip interface Vlan 1 is up addressing mode is Dhcp Interface address is 10 1 0 254 mask is 255 255 255 0 Primary MTU is 1500 bytes Proxy ARP is disabled Split horizon is enabled Console Related Commands ip dhcp relay server 4 101 4 100 DHCP COMMANDS ip dh
128. session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console Console Console Console config interface vlan 1 config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 config if exit config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached ENTERING COMMANDS After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 At the prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty O prompt for the administrator to show that you ate using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty 0 gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode e Normal Exec 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the SMC6724L3 1 Switch is opened To end the C
129. the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parametets 4 4 ENTERING COMMANDS Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL DHCP Interface Line Router or VLAN Database You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show gt displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group Access groups access list Access lists arp Information of arp cache bridge ext Bridge extend information dot1x Show 802 1x content garp Garp property gvrp Show GVRP information of interface history Information of history interfaces Information of interfaces ip IP information line TTY line information logging Show the contents of logging buffers mac MAC access lists mac address table Set configuration of the address table map Map priority port Characteristics of the port pvlan Information of private VLAN queue Information of priority queue radius server RADIUS server information rip Rip router Rout
130. the router forwards the packet on all interfaces except for the incoming interface The router will transmit a prune message back out the receiving interface i e the parent interface to its upstream neighboring router if there are no group members on its child interfaces A prune message tells the upstream router to stop forwarding packets for a particular source group pair for the prune lifetime If the router that previously sent a prune message now discovers a new group member on one of its connections it sends a graft message to the upstream router When an upstream router receives this message it cancels the prune message If necessary graft messages are propagated back toward the source until reaching the nearest live branch in the multicast tree source flooding wE ATATA RA AAAA potential hosts l Ab source e aan er Petete E pruning source aaa fstotetet EEN RA MULTICAST ROUTING The global settings that control the prune and graft messages 1 e prune lifetime should be configured to the same values on all routers throughout the network to allow DVMRP to function properly However if yo
131. to textual user interface Send mail to technical support Mine Connect to SMC Web Page CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 Console config snmp server location WC 9 Console config snmp server contact Ted Console config exit Console show system System description TigerSwitch 10 100 Managed 24 2 L3 Switch System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 29 System information System Up time 0 days System Name System Location System Contact MAC address Web server Web server port Ingress rate limit POST result Console 2 hours 4 minutes R amp D 5 wc 9 Ted 00 30 1 47 58 3a enable 80 Disabled and 7 13 seconds 4 32 4 92 4 91 4 51 3 13 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 14 Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management softwate as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Service Tag Not implemented Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports and expansion ports Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply Management Software Loader Version
132. type Syntax netbios node type Ape no netbios node type type Specifies the NetBIOS node type e broadcast hybrid recommended e mixed e peer to peer Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Example Console config dhcp netbios node type hybrid Console config dhcp Related Commands netbios name server 4 110 4 111 COMMAND LINE INTEREACE lease Use this command to configure the duration that an IP address is assigned to a DHCP client Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax lease days hours minutes infinite no lease days Specifies the duration of the lease in numbers of days Range 0 364 hours Specifies the number of hours in the lease A days value must be supplied before you can configure hours Range 0 23 minutes Specifies the number of minutes in the lease A days and hours value must be supplied before you can configure minutes Range 0 59 infinite Specifies that the lease time is unlimited This option is normally used for addresses manually bound to a BOOTP client via the host command Default Setting One day Command Modes DHCP Pool Configuration Example The following example leases an address to clients using this pool for 7 days Console config dhcp lease 7 Console config dhcp 4 112 host DHCP COMMANDS Use this command to specify the IP address and network mask to manually b
133. up IGMP is enable version is 2 Robustness variable is 2 Query interval is 125 sec Query Max Response Time is 10 sec Last Member Query Interval is 1 sec Querier is 10 1 0 253 Console Displaying Multicast Group Information When IGMP Layer 3 is enabled on this switch the current multicast groups learned via IGMP can be displayed in the IP IGMP Group Information page When IGMP Layer 3 is disabled and IGMP Layer 2 is enabled you can view the active multicast groups in the IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table see page 3 142 Command Attributes Group Address IP multicast group address with subscribers directly attached or downstream from this switch Interface The interface on this switch that has received traffic directed to the multicast group address Last Reporter The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for this multicast group address on this interface If no membership report has been received this object has the value 0 0 0 0 Up time The time elapsed since this entry was created Expire The time remaining before this entry will be aged out Default 260 seconds IP ROUTING V1 Timer The time remaining until the switch assumes that there are no longer any IGMP Version 1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface Default 400 seconds Ifthe switch receives an IGMP Version 1 Membership Report it sets a timer to note that
134. up resources by repeating ARP requests for addresses recently flushed from the table End stations that require Proxy ARP must view the entire network as a single network These nodes must therefore use a smaller subnet mask than that used by the router or other relevant network devices Extensive use of Proxy ARP can degrade router performance because it may lead to increased ARP traffic and increased search time for larger ARP address tables Command Attributes Timeout Sets the aging time for dynamic entries in the ARP cache Range 300 86400 seconds Default 1200 seconds or 20 minutes Proxy ARP Enables or disables Proxy ARP for specified VLAN interfaces 3 159 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 160 Web Click IP ARP General Set the timeout to a suitable value for the ARP cache enable Proxy ARP for subnetworks that do not have routing or a default gateway and click Apply General Timeout Set Timeout 300 86400 sencodes ETS Proxy ARP Vian 3 gt Status Enabled y sl CLI This example sets the ARP cache timeout for 15 minutes i e 900 seconds and enables Proxy ARP for VLAN 3 Console config arp timeout 900 4 223 Console config interface vlan 3 4 119 Console config if ip proxy arp 4 224 Console config if Configuring Static ARP Addresses For devices that do not respond to ARP requests traffic will be dropped because the IP address cannot be ma
135. 0 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP which only offers best effort delivery Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server e RADIUS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify two authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 33 RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 62 radius server port Sets t
136. 0 6 eee eee eee 4 18 silent timle a 4 19 database ita 4 20 PAL A DA AA AAA 4 21 PEA A AS A AER SO 4 22 STOP BIS a a doc 4 23 SHOWS E cias sind e pan detenida fads LE wad ha o da ca EE 4 23 General Commands ooococccccnnoccccc cece eens 4 24 enables ar apache tag in hase en noe a A old A E 8 4 25 disables td OS 4 26 CONT a A EN A Az 4 27 show history in di nt as 4 27 red e nO ad Deeg 4 28 dd daa Da 4 29 A E dias iS 4 29 US RI E A a is hele 4 30 System Management Commands oooccccccococonoccccc 4 31 Device Designation Commands o occoccccoccccccoo ooo 4 31 hostia Lew tah Sucks Ad Ae 4 32 User Access Commands 0 0 6 0 eee eens 4 32 CONTENTS username A A E 4 33 enable password n aa a eya T nE E EE ERE ee 4 34 Web Server Commands o ooooooccccccccnoo cc 4 35 IP EP POTE A A A da 4 35 IPP SEVA A Ae 4 36 Event Logging Commands 1 2 0 0 cece eee ee eee 4 37 A hse 4 37 logoina history jis ines 2 i ae Se as iad bs eth ee A 4 38 Cleat lr tt ta 4 39 show Los a da id 4 40 Time Comma ds ao ir ack Aad erate 4 41 sftp Cent Seis eta ates Wan ha ia Ai 4 42 SPC a ake hee 4 43 Sapporo a do PU A ER 4 44 smtp broadcast client olvida ici ad in 4 45 SHOW SAUDE 60 Wins a sian a Had se ahs pean de teh hei pai 4 45 Clock timez Ones iia Aid A Acie aad 4 46 System Status Commands 0 cece cece eee eee 4 47 show startup config 6 ee eee eee 4 47 show rtunning config 6 eee eee 4 49 SHOW SYStEM ida
137. 0 20 30 40 50 static 2 345 30 20 23 09 50 40 30 20 10 dynamic 3 Total entry 5 Console ip proxy arp 4 224 Use this command to enable proxy Address Resolution Protocol ARP Use the no form to disable proxy ARP Syntax ip proxy arp no ip proxy arp Default Setting Disabled TP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage Proxy ARP allows a non routing device to determine the MAC address of a host on another subnet or network Example Console config interface vlan 3 Console config if ip proxy arp Console config if IP Routing Commands After you configure network interfaces for this router you must set the paths used to send traffic between different interfaces If you enable routing on this device traffic will automatically be forwarded between all of the local subnetworks However to forward traffic to devices on other subnetworks you can either configure fixed paths with static routing commands or enable a dynamic routing protocol that exchanges information with other routers on the network to automatically determine the best path to any subnetwork This section includes commands for both static and dynamic routing These commands ate used to connect between different local subnetworks or to connect the router to the enterprise network Command Group Function Page Global Routing Configures global parameters for static and dynamic 4 226
138. 00 Fax 949 679 1481 From Europe Contact details can be found on www smc europe com or www smc com INTERNET E mail addresses techsupport smc com european techsupport smc europe com Driver updates http www smc com index cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com http www smc europe com FOR LITERATURE OR ADVERTISING RESPONSE CALL U S A and Canada 800 SMC 4 YOU Fax 949 679 1481 Spain 34 91 352 00 40 Fax 34 93 477 3774 UK 44 0 1932 866553 Fax 44 0 118 974 8701 France 33 0 41 38 32 32 Fax 33 0 41 38 01 58 Italy 39 0 3355708602 Fax 39 02 739 14 17 Benelux 31 33 455 72 88 Fax 31 33 455 73 30 Central Europe 49 0 89 92861 0 Fax 49 0 89 92861 230 Nordic 46 0 868 70700 Fax 46 0 887 62 62 34 93 477 4920 216 712 36616 Fax 34 93 477 3774 Fax 216 71751415 Eastern Europe Sub Saharian Africa North West Africa 34 93 477 4920 Fax 34 93 477 3774 CIS 7 095 7893573 Fax 7 095 789 357 PRC 86 10 6235 4958 Fax 86 10 6235 4962 Taiwan 886 2 87978006 Fax 886 2 87976288 Asia Pacific 65 238 6556 Fax 65 238 6466 Korea 82 2 553 0860 Fax 82 2 553 7202 Japan 81 45 224 2332 Fax 81 45 224 2331 Australia 61 2 8875 7887 Fax 61 2 8875 7777 India 91 22 8204437 Fax 91 22 8204443 If you are looking for further contact information please visit www smc com www smc europe com or www smc asia com SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 Phone 949
139. 00 e0 29 94 34 de Destination Mask Ethernet Type 800 Packet Format Any bd Add CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Binding a Port to an Access Control List After configuring Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You can only assign one IP access list and or one MAC access list to any port Command Attributes e Port Fixed port or module Range 1 26 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port e MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port Web Click ACL ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding Port IP MAC Trunk 1 W Enable david y IV Enable jerry 2 Enable david FP Enable jerry 7 3 Enable F Enable fiery 4 T Enable I Enable fiery 2 5 T Enable E I Enable fiery ZI gt CLI This examples assigns an IP and MAC access list to port 1 and an IP access list to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 119 Console config if ttip access group david in 4 81 Console config if imac access group jerry in 4 87 Console c
140. 1 252 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 253 10 1 1 252 Entry Count 1 3 202 IP ROUTING Change any of the interface specific protocol parameters and then click Apply Detailed Interface Configuration VLAN ID Rtr Priority 0 255 Transmit Delay O 3600 seconds Retransmit Interval O 3600 seconds Hello Interval 1 65535 seconds Rtr Dead Interval 0 65535 seconds Cost 0 65535 Authentication Type MD 5 Authentication Key aiebel A Message Digest Key id 0 255 CLI This example configures the interface parameters for VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf priority 5 4 268 Console config if ip ospf transmit delay 6 4 270 Console config if ip ospf retransmit interval 7 4 269 Console config if ip ospf hello interval 5 4 268 Console config if ip ospf dead interval 50 4 267 Console config if tip ospf cost 10 4 266 Console config if ip ospf authentication message digest 4 263 Console config if ip ospf message digest key 1 md5 aiebel 4 265 Console 3 203 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 204 Configuring Virtual Links All OSPF areas must connect to the backbone If an area does not have a isolated area direct physical connection to the backbone you can configure a virtual link that ah provides a logical path to the Sider backbone To connect an link backbone ABR i
141. 10 2 9 254 OSPF intra 2 3 Total entry 4 Console Field Description Ip IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host Note that Address the address 0 0 0 0 indicates the default gateway for this router Netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet Next Hop IP address of the next hop or gateway used for this route Protocol The protocol which generated this route information Values static local RIP OSPF Metric Cost for this interface Interface VLAN interface through which this address can be reached show ip traffic Use this command to display statistics for IP ICMP UDP TCP and ARP protocols Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage For a description of the information shown by this command see Displaying Statistics for IP Protocols on page 3 165 4 229 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show ip traffic IP statistics Revd 5 total 5 local destination 0 checksum errors 0 unknown protocol 0 not a gateway Frags 0 reassembled 0 timeouts 0 fragmented 0 couldn t fragment Sent 9 generated 0 no route ICMP statistics Revd 0 checksum errors 0 redirects 0 unreachable 0 echo echo reply 0 mask requests 0 mask replies 0 quench parameter 0 timestamp redirects 0 unreachable 0 echo 0 echo reply mask requests 0 mask replies 0 quench 0 timestamp 0 time exceeded 0 parameter problem UDP statistics Revd
142. 179 including send and receive versions message loopback prevention and authentication Statistics Displays general information on update time 3 183 route changes and number of queries as well as a list of statistics for known interfaces and neighbors OSPF 3 186 General Enables or disables OSPF also configures the 3 188 Configuration Router ID and various other global settings Area Configuration Specifies rules for importing routes into each 3 192 atea Area Range Configures route summaries to advertise atan 3 196 Configuration atea boundary Interface Shows area ID and designated router also 3 198 Configuration configures OSPF protocol settings and authentication for each interface Virtual Link Configures virtual link through transit area to 3 204 Configuration backbone Network Area Defines OSPF areas and associated interfaces 3 206 Address Configuration Summary Address Aggregates routes learned from other protocols 3 208 Configuration for advertising into other autonomous systems Redistribute Redistributes routes from one routing domain to 3 210 Configuration another NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Menu Description Page NSSA Settings Configures settings for importing routes into or 3 212 exporting routes out of not so stubby areas Link State Database Shows information about different OSPF Link 3 213 Information State Advertisements LS
143. 254ca 1 vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active 1 interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 ip address 10 1 0 1 255 255 255 0 1 1 1 1 1 line console 1 line vty 1 end Console Related Commands show startup config 4 47 4 50 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS show system Use this command to display system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e Fora description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 12 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System description TigerSwitch 10 100 Managed 24 2 L3 Switch System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 29 System information System Up time 0 days 1 hours 23 minutes and 44 61 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 30 1 47 58 3a Web server enable Web server port 80 Ingress rate limit Disabled POST result Console show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 51 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The sessi
144. 3 F Console Field Description Source and netmask Subnetwork containing the IP multicast source Group address IP multicast group address for a requested service Owner The associated multicast protocol i e DVMRP or PIM DM Upstream Interface Interface leading to the upstream neighbor Upstream Router IP address of the multicast router immediately upstream for this group Downstream interface The interface s on which multicast subscribers have been and flags recorded The flags associated with each interface indicate prune P if the downstream interface has been recently terminated or forwarding F if the interface is still active 4 289 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE This example lists all entries in the multicast table in summary form Console show ip mroute summary IP Multicast Forwarding is enabled IP Multicast Routing Table Summary Flags P Prune UP Group Source Source Mask Interface Owner Flags fas 224 1 1 1 10 1 0 0 255 255 0 0 vlanl DVMRP 224 2 2 2 10 1 0 0 255 255 0 0 vlanl DVMRP Console DVMRP Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page router dvmrp Enables DVMRP and enters router GC 4 291 configuration mode probe interval Sets the interval for sending neighbor probe RC 4 292 messages nbr timeout Sets the delay before declaring an attached RC 4 293 neighbor router down report interval Sets the interval for p
145. 5 Console config if speed duplex 100half Console config if no negotiation Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 121 capabilities 4 122 negotiation Use this command to enable autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax negotiation no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 121 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDIX pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 122 speed duplex 4 120 capabilities 4 122 Use this command to advertise the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric no cap
146. 5 TLS Transport Layer Security TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security or other The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked The operation of dot1x on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned e RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified 3 33 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 34 Each switch port that will be used must be set to dotlx Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client softwate installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1x client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 TLS TTLS PEAP etc Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity looku
147. 5 ASBR External LSA is describing a default route its nk state id is set to the default destination 0 0 0 0 e self originate Shows LSAs originated by this router database summary Shows a count for each LSA type for each atea stored in the database and the total number of LSAs in the database e external Shows information about external LSAs e network Shows information about network LSAs e nssa external Shows information about NSSA external LSAs e router Shows information about router LSAs summary Shows information about summary LSAs Command Mode Privileged Exec Examples The following shows output for the show ip ospf database command Console show ip ospf database Displaying Router Link States Area 10 1 0 0 Link ID ADV Router Age Seq Checksum LO G1 ds 252 10 42 5252 26 0xX80000005 0X89A1 1031315253 1021 d 525 3 23 0xX80000002 OX8D9D Displaying Net Link States Area 10 1 0 0 Link ID ADV Router Age Seat Checksum 10 1 1 252 10 1 1 252 28 0X80000001 0X53F1 Console Field Description Link ID Router ID ADV Router Advertising router ID Age Age of LSA in seconds Seq Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate LSAs Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA 4 274 IP ROUTING COMMANDS The following shows output when using the asbr summary keyword Console show ip ospf database asbr summary OSPF Router with id 10 1 1 2
148. 53 Displaying Summary ASB Link States Area 0 0 0 0 LS age 433 Options No TOS capability LS Type Summary Links AS Boundary Router Link State ID Advertising Router LS Sequence Number 192 168 5 1 AS Boundary Router s Router ID 192 168 1 5 80000002 LS Checksum 0x51E2 Length 32 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Metric 1 Console Field Description OSPF Router id Router ID LS age Age of LSA in seconds Options Optional capabilities associated with the LSA LS Type Summary Links LSA describes routes to AS boundary routers Link State ID Interface address of the autonomous system boundary router Advertising Router Advertising router ID LS Sequence Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate Number LSAs LS Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA Length The length of the LSA in bytes Network Mask Address mask for the network Metrics Cost of the link 4 275 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The following shows output when using the database summary keywotd Console show ip ospf database database summary Area ID 10 1 0 0 Router Network Sum Net Sum ASBR External AS External Nssa 2 1 1 0 0 0 Total LSA Counts 4 Console Field Description Area ID Area identifier Router Number of router LSAs Network Number of network LSAs Sum Net Number of summary LSAs Sum ASBR Number of summary ASBR LSAs Exter
149. 54 Metrics Cost of the link Forward Address Forwarding address for data to be passed to the advertised destination If set to 0 0 0 0 data is forwarded to the originator of the advertisement External Route Tag 32 bit field attached to each external route Not used by OSPF may be used to communicate other information between boundary routers as defined by specific applications Ao COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The following shows output when using the network keyword LS age 433 Options LS Type Link State ID LS Checksum Length 32 Network Mask Console Link State Data Network Attached Router Attached Router Console show ip ospf database network OSPF Router with id 10 1 1 253 Displaying Net Link States Area 10 1 0 0 Type 2 Support External routing capability Network Links IOs 1317292 IP interface address of the Designated Router Advertising Router LS Sequence Number 0x51E2 10015202 80000002 2553259529950 1011202 10 TL 3 253 Field Description OSPF Router id Router ID LS age Age of LSA in seconds Options Optional capabilities associated with the LSA LS Type Network Link LSA describes the routers attached to the network Link State ID Interface address of the designated router Advertising Router Advertising router ID LS Sequence Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate Number L
150. 679 8000 Model Number SMC6724L3 Publication Number 150200033700A Revision Number F1 2 0 4 E102003 RO1
151. 74 CLI See the example on page 3 164 3 170 TCP Statistics IP ROUTING The Transmission Control Protocol TCP provides highly reliable host to host connections in packet switched networks and is used in conjunction with IP to support a wide variety of Internet protocols Statistical Values Parameter Description Segments Received The total number of segments received including those received in error This count includes segments received on currently established connections Segments Sent The total number of segments sent including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets Active Opens The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN SENT state from the CLOSED state Failed Connection Attempts The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN SENT state or the SYN RCVD state plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN RCVD state Current Connections The number of TCP connections for which the current tate is either ESTABLISHED or CLOSE WAIT an Receive Errors The total number of segments received in error e g bad TCP checksums Segments Retransmitted The total number of segments retransmitted that is the number of TCP segments transmitted containing
152. 8 Summary Summary 3 Set CLI This example configures area 0 0 0 1 as a normal area area 0 0 0 2 as a stub and area 0 0 0 3 as an NSSA It also configures the router to propagate a default summary route into the stub and sets the cost for this default route to 10 Console config router network 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 area 0 0 0 1 4 255 Console config router area 0 0 0 2 stub summary 4 257 Console config router tarea 0 0 0 2 default cost 10 4 252 Console config router tarea 0 0 0 3 nssa 4 258 Console config router end 3 195 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 196 Console show ip ospf 4 271 Routing Process with ID 192 168 1 253 Supports only single TOS TOSO route Number of area in this router is 3 Area 0 0 0 0 BACKBONE Number of interfaces in this area is 1 SPF algorithm executed 40 times Area 0 0 0 2 STUB Number of interfaces in this area is 1 SPF algorithm executed 8 times Area 0 0 0 3 NSSA Number of interfaces in this area is 1 SPF algorithm executed 40 times Console Configuring Area Ranges Route Summarization for ABRs An OSPF area can include a large number of nodes If the Area Border Router ABR has to advertise route information for each of area ABR area these nodes this wastes a lot of bandwidth summary and processor time Instead you can route configure an ABR to advertise a single summary route that covers all the individual networks wit
153. ATION The switch s Web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions Set user names and passwords for up to 16 users Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration Configure IP routing for unicast or multicast traffic Configure IGMP multicast filtering Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP Configure Spanning Tree parameters Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing Configure up to six static or LACP trunks Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port Display system information and statistics Required Connections 2 2 The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide CONNECTING TO THE SWITCH To connect a terminal to the console port complete the
154. As stored in this router s database Border Router Displays routing table entries for area border 3 216 Information routers and autonomous system boundary routers Neighbor Display information about neighboring routers 3 217 Information on each interface within an OSPF area DVMRP 3 222 General Settings Configure global settings for prune and graft 3 223 messages and the exchange of routing information Interface Settings Enables disables DVMRP pet interface and sets 3 227 route metric Neighbor Displays neighboring DVMRP routers 3 229 Information Routing Table Displays DVMRP routing information 3 230 PIM DM General Settings Enables or disables PIM DM globally for the 3 232 switch Interface Settings Enables disables PIM DM per interface 3 233 configures protocol settings for hello prune and graft messages Interface Displays summary information for each interface 3 236 Information Neighbor Displays neighboring PIM DM routers 3 237 Information DHCP 3 53 Relay Configuration Specifies DHCP relay servers enables or 3 53 disables relay service Server Configures DHCP server parameters 3 53 3 11 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Menu Description Page General Enables DHCP server configures excluded 3 56 address range Pool Configuration Configures address pools for network groups or 3 57 a specific host IP Binding Displays addresses currently bound to DHCP 3 62 clients ACL 3 41 ACL Configuration
155. BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN interface through which the management station is attached Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 BASIC CONFIGURATION Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 Manual Configuration Web Click IP General Routing Interface Select the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static and specify a Primary interface enter the IP address and subnet mask then click Set IP Configuration Routing Interface VLAN fi IP Address Mode Static Primary y IP Address hoss Subnet Mask 2552552550 Set IP Configuration Remove IP Address H Click IP Global Setting If this switch and management stations exist on other network segments then specify the default gateway and click Apply Global Settings IP Routing Status Enabled Default Gateway 10 1 0 254 Clear default gateway 3 19 CONFIGURING THE S
156. Command Function Page Groups Priority Configures default priority for untagged frames sets 4 181 Layer 2 queue weights and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP DSCP 4 187 Layer 3 and 4 tags to class of service values Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page switchport priority Sets a port priority for incoming untagged IC 4 182 default frames queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority GC 4 183 queues queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the IC 4 184 priority queues show queue Shows round robin weights assigned to the PE 4 185 bandwidth priority queues show queue Shows the class of service map PE 4 186 cos map show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational PE 4 131 switchport status of an interface 4 181 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport priority default 4 182 Use this command to set a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode
157. Console config spanning tree priority 40000 4 151 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 4 150 Console config spanning tree max age 38 4 150 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 4 149 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 4 152 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 4 153 Console config Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes e STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A porton a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding Iftwo ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitio
158. D Identifier for an area stub or NSSA e Area Type Specifies a normal area stub area or not so stubby area NSSA Area ID 0 0 0 0 is set to the backbone by default Default Normal area Default Cost Cost for the default summary route sent into a stub from an area border router ABR Range 0 16777215 Default 1 Note that if you set the default cost to 0 the router will not advertise a default route into the attached stub e Summary Makes an ABR send a Type 3 summary link advertisement into a stub Default Summary A stub is designed to save routing table space by blocking Type 4 AS summary LSAs and Type 5 external LSAs If you use the NoSummaty option to also block Type 3 summary LSAs that advertise the default route for destinations external to the local area or the AS the stub will become completely isolated Note This router supports up to 16 total areas either normal transit areas stubs or NSSAs 3 194 IP ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Area Configuration Set any area to a stub or NSSA as required specify the cost for the default summary route sent into a stub and click Apply Area Configuration Current Area Configuration Area ID Area Type Default Cost Summary Remove 0000 Backbone 00 0 1 O 0 0 0 2 Stub Summary FP 00 03 NSSA O Entry Count 4 Remove Area Configuration Settings Area ID ho Area Type Normal y Default Cost 0 1677721
159. D is elected Example Console config router router id 10 1 1 1 Console config router Related Commands router ospf 4 246 4 247 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE compatible rfc1583 Use this command to calculate summary route costs using RFC 1583 OSPFv1 Use the no form to calculate costs using RFC 2328 OSPFv2 Syntax compatible rfc1583 no compatible rfc1583 Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting RFC 1583 compatible Command Usage All routers in an OSPF routing domain should use the same RFC for calculating summary routes Example Console config router compatible rfc1583 Console config router default information originate Use this command to generate a default external route into an autonomous system Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax default information originate always metric nterface metric metric type zzetric type no default information originate e always Always advertise a default route to the local AS regardless of whether the router has a default route See ip route on page 227 interface metric Metric assigned to the default route Range 1 65535 Default 10 metric type External link type used to advertise the default route Options Type 1 Type 2 Default Type 2 4 248 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting Disabled Command Usage e The metric for the default
160. EMENT COMMANDS Example Console config itsntp poll 60 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 42 sntp broadcast client Use this command to synchronize the switch s clock based on time broadcast from time servers using the multicast address 224 0 1 1 Use the no form to disable SNTP broadcast client mode Syntax sntp broadcast client no sntp broadcast client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config sntp broadcast client Console show sntp Use this command to display the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 45 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode and the current SNTP mode i e client or broadcast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast Console clock timezone Use this command to set the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before ute after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 1 12 hours minutes Numbe
161. FC 1583 compatibility mode to ensure that the same method is used to calculate summary route costs throughout the network when older IP ROUTING OSPF routers exist as well as the not so stubby area option RFC 1587 isolated stub area ABR ABR virtual link backbone ABR normal area ABR ASBR NSSA ASBR Autonomous System A ASBR Router external network Autonomous System B Command Usage OSPF looks at more than just the simple hop count When adding the shortest path to any node into the tree the optimal path is chosen on the basis of delay throughput and connectivity OSPF utilizes IP multicast to reduce the amount of routing traffic required when sending or receiving routing path updates The separate routing area scheme used by OSPF further reduces the amount of routing traffic and thus inherently provides another level of routing protection In addition all routing protocol exchanges can be authenticated Finally the OSPF algorithms have been tailored for efficient operation in TCP IP Internets 3 187 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 188 e OSPFv2 is a compatible upgrade to OSPF It involves enhancements to protocol message authentication and the addition of a point to multipoint interface which allows OSPF to run over non broadcast networks as well as support for overlapping area rang
162. GMP Layer 3 Disabled Multicast Routing DVMRP Disabled PIM DM Disabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 1 11 INTRODUCTION 1 12 CHAPTER 2 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a Web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 The switch s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard Web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s Web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as HP OpenView 2 1 INITIAL CONFIGUR
163. IDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 4 175 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension PE 4 176 configuration switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 177 switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC 4 171 vlan interface show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the NE 4 178 selected interface PE garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected IC 4 178 function show gatp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected NE 4 180 function PE bridge ext gvrp Use this command to enable GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax bridge ext gvrp no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled 4 175 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration
164. ITCH 3 18 You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Usage This section describes how to configure a single local interface for initial access to the switch To configure multiple IP interfaces on this switch you must set up an IP interface for each VLAN page 3 155 To enable routing between the different interfaces on this switch you must enable IP routing page 3 154 To enable routing between the interfaces defined on this switch and external network interfaces you must configure static routes page 3 172 or use dynamic routing i e either RIP page 3 175 or OSPF page 3 186 The precedence for configuring IP interfaces is the IP General Routing Interface menu page 3 155 static routes page 3 172 and then dynamic routing Command Attributes VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP
165. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service The following parameters are used to control Layer 3 IGMP and query functions Command Attributes e VLAN Interface VLAN interface bound to a primary IP address Range 1 4094 IGMP Protocol Status Admin Status Enables IGMP on a VLAN interface Default Disabled Last Member Query Interval A multicast client sends an IGMP leave message when it leaves a group The router then checks to see if this was the last host in the group by sending an IGMP query and starting a timer based on this command If no reports are received before the timer expires the group is deleted Range 0 25 seconds Default 1 second This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group 3 145 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 146 Max Query Response Time Configures the maximum response time advertised in IGMP queries Range 0 25 seconds Default 10 seconds The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines how long any responder i e client or router still in the group has to respond to a query message before the router deletes the group By varying the Maximum Query Response Time you can tune the burstiness of IGMP messages passed on the subn
166. L has been assigned 3 43 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 44 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action Address SubMask Remove Permit 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove IP Ip y Address 1689216 0 SubMask 255 255 240 0 Add CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 4 78 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules Src Dst IP Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Src Dst Address Source or destination IP address ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Src Dst SubMask Subnet mask for source or destination address See SubMask in the preceding section Protocol Specifie
167. LAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 172 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode fora IC 4 165 specified VLAN switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for IC 4 166 an interface switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an IC 4 167 acceptable frame interface types switchport Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 168 ingress filtering switchport native Configures the PVID native VLAN of an IC 4 169 vlan interface 4 164 VLAN COMMANDS Command Function Mode Page switchport allowed Configures the VLANs associated with an IC 4 170 vlan interface switchport evrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 177 switchport forbidden Configures forbidden VLANs for an IC 4 171 vlan interface interface vlan Use this command to enter interface configuration mode for VLANs and configure a physical interface Syntax interface vlan v an id vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console
168. LANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 16 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled 3 115 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 116 GARP Join Timer The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leavinga VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes r
169. LI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port COMMAND LINE INTERFACE You can enter commands as follows e To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config e To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to
170. Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping Parameters on page 3 137 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attribute Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN 1 224 1 1 12 Unit1 Port1
171. NTERFACE Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface overall bridge or a selected interface Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 147 spanning tree mode Configures STP or RSTP mode GC 4 148 spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 149 forward time forward time spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge hello GC 4 150 hello time time spanning tree Configures the spanning tree bridge GC 4 150 max age maximum age spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 151 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for RSTP GC 4 152 path cost method spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for RSTP GC 4 153 transmission limit spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of IC 4 154 an interface spanning tree Configures the spanning tree priority of an IC 4 155 port priority interface spanning tree Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 156 edge port spanning tree Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 157 portfast spanning tree Configures the link type for RSTP IC 4 158 link type spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 159 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows span
172. P ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF NSSA Settings Create a new NSSA or modify the routing behavior for an existing NSSA and click Apply NSSA Settings Current NSSA Settings Area ID Default Information Originate No Redistribution Remove 0 0 0 1 Enabled Disabled y O 00 02 Disabled y Enabled y O Entry Count 3 Remove NSSA Settings Area ID Default Information Originate Enabled No Redistribution Enabled CLI This example configures area 0 0 0 1 as a stub and sets the cost for the default summary route to 10 Console config router tarea 0 0 0 1 nssa default information originate 4 258 Console config router tarea 0 0 0 2 nssa no redistribution 4 258 Console config router Displaying Link State Database Information OSPF routers advertise routes using Link State Advertisements LSAs The full collection of LSAs collected by a router interface from the attached area is known as a link state database Routers that are connected to multiple interfaces will have a separate database for each area Each router in the same area should have an identical database describing the topology for that area and the shortest path to external destinations 3 213 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 214 The full database is exchanged between neighboring routers as soon as a new router is discovered Afterwards any changes that occur in the routing tables are synchronized with neighbori
173. Period 3600 seconds Timeout for Tx Peroid 30 seconds Supplicant timeout 30 seconds Server timeout 30 seconds Re authentication Max Count 2 CLI This example shows the default protocol settings for dot1x For a description of the additional entries displayed in the CLI See show dot1x on page 72 Console show dotlx 4 72 Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 300 quiet period 350 tx period 300 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Mode Authorized 1 disabled ForceAuthorized n a 2 disabled ForceAuthorized n a 25 disabled ForceAuthorized yes 26 enabled Auto yes 3 35 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 36 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 802 1X is enabled on port 26 Max request 2 Quiet period 350 Reauth period 300 Tx period 300 Status Unauthorized Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 00 Authenticator State Machine State Connecting Reauth Count 3 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 0 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console Configuring 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication ser
174. Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member 3 113 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Open VLAN VLAN Static Membership Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 C Trunk y Query Member Non Member Wan 1 Vian 2 a CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 119 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 170 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3 114 You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically regis
175. Remove pue E z Target Port 1 CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 119 Console config 1f port monitor ethernet 1 13 4 133 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes 3 71 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 72 passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as SMC s EliteView Statistical Values Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Re
176. Resp ld 682 Tx EAP Resp ld 1020 Rx EAP Resp Oth 01x EAP Resp Oth 20 Refresh CLI This example displays the dot1x statistics for port 4 Console show dotlx statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 72 Eth 1 4 Rx EXPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Reg Oth 2017 1005 0 Console 3 40 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests incoming packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one If a list contains all permit rules a packet will be accepted as soon as it passes any of the rules Ifa list contains all deny rules a packet will be rejected as soon as it fails any one of the rules In other words if no rules match for a permit list the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a deny list the packet is accepted Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs
177. Routing DVMRP PIM DM Multicast Configures global and interface settings for 4 301 Routing PIM DM Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Adds a multicast router port GC 4 286 vlan mrouter show ip igmp Shows multicast router ports PE 4 287 snooping mrouter 4 285 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter Use this command to statically configure a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan an d mrouter interface no ip igmp snooping vlan an d mrouter interface vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 gt interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config 4 286 MULTICAS
178. SAs LS Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA Length The length of the LSA in bytes Network Mask Address mask for the network Attached Router List of routers attached to the network i e fully adjacent to the designated router including the designated router itself IP ROUTING COMMANDS The following shows output when using the router keyword Link State ID LS Checksum Length 48 Router Role Number of Links Link Data Link Type Metrics 1 Console show ip ospf database router OSPF Router with id 10 1 1 253 Displaying Router Link States Area 10 1 0 0 Link State Data Router Support External routing capability LS age 233 Options LS Type Router Links 10 1 51 3252 Advertising Router LS Sequence Number 0x7287 Area Border Router Link ID 10 1 7 0 255 255 2557 0 Connection to a stub network Number of TOS metrics 0 Type 1 Originating Router s Router ID TO 81 7252 80000011 IP Network Subnet Number Network s IP address mask Console Field Description OSPF Router id Router ID LS age Age of LSA in seconds Options Optional capabilities associated with the LSA LS Type Router Link LSA describes the router s interfaces Link State ID Router ID of the router that originated the LSA Advertising Router Advertising router ID LS Sequence Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate Number
179. SWITCH CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 17 and 18 Just connect these ports to two LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 17 4 119 Console config if tlacp 4 139 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 18 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 128 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100tx Mac address 22 22 22 22 22 2d Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control status Disabled Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Console Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage e When configuring static trunks you statically may not be able to link switches of configured different types depending on the as manufacturer s implementation El H r note that the static trunk owever note at the static trunks active on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel links compatible To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuratio
180. Server IP address 10 1 0 1 Communication key with radius server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console 4 65 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 802 1x Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1x dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAPOL Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN Command Function Mode Page authentication dotlx Sets the default authentication server type GC 4 67 default dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default GC 4 67 values dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times the GC 4 68 switch will attempt to send a request to the RADIUS server before authentication fails dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 68 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 69 dot1x Enables re authentication for all ports GC 4 69 re authentication dot1x timeout Sets the time that a switch port waits after GC 4 70 quiet period the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout Sets the time period after which a GC 4 70 re authperiod connected client must be re authenticated dot1x timeout Sets the time period during an GC 4 71 tx perio
181. Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Query time out 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch 3 139 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 1 Multicast Router List Unit Portl1 Static CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 287 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1
182. Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Hardware 00 10 B5 51 69 F7 Address Ethernet Client Identifier bear Text Default Router2 optional DNS Server2 optional Netbios Server2 optional O day hour min 3 61 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example configures a host address pool Console config ip dhcp pool mgr 4 104 Console config dhcp host 10 1 0 19 255 255 255 0 4 113 Console config dhcp hardware address 00 e0 29 94 34 28 ethernet 4 115 Console config dhcp client identifier text bear 4 114 Console config dhcp default router 10 1 0 253 4 106 Console config dhcp dns server 10 2 3 4 4 108 Console config dhcp netbios name server 10 1 0 33 4 110 Console config dhcp netbios node type hybrid 4 111 Console config dhcp domain name example com 4 107 Console config dhcp bhootfile wme bat 4 109 Console config dhcp next server 10 1 0 21 4 109 Console config dhcp lease infinite 4 112 Console config dhcp Displaying Address Bindings You can display the host devices which have acquired an IP address from this switch s DHCP server Command Attributes IP Address IP address assigned to host e Mac Address MAC address of host e Lease time Duration that this IP address can be used by the host Start time Time this address was assigned by the switch Delete Clears this binding to the host This command is normally used after modifying the address
183. Syntax stopbits 1 2 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line show line Use this command to display the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty e console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 23 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Vty configuration Password threshold Interactive timeout 3 times 655135 General Commands sensitive Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 25 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 26 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 27 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 27 reload Restarts the system PE 4 28 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 29 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or any 4 29 exits the CLI quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 30 help Shows how to u
184. T ROUTING COMMANDS show ip igmp snooping mrouter Use this command to display information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan v an id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Dynamic Console General Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip multicast routing Enables IP multicast routing GC 4 288 show ip mroute Shows the IP multicast routing table PE 4 288 4 287 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip multicast routing Use this command to enable IP multicast routing Use the no form to disable IP multicast routing Syntax ip multicast routing no ip multicast routing Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is used to enable multicast routing globally for the router You also need to globally enable a specific multicast routing protocol using the router dvmrp or router pim command and then specify the interfaces that will support multicast routing using the ip dvmrp or ip
185. TERFACE spanning tree cost Use this command to configure the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 e Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Setting Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority e When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 152 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if 4 154 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree port priority Use this command to configure the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priori
186. The download file must be a binary software file for this switch After the file has been downloaded you are prompted with Update Image File to specify the type of code file Press lt R gt for runtime code lt D gt for diagnostic code or lt L gt for loader code Note If you select lt L gt for loader code be sure the file is a valid loader code file for the switch If you download an invalid file the switch will not be able to boot Unless absolutely necessary do not attempt to download loader code files Specify a name for the downloaded code file File names are case sensitive should be from 1 to 31 characters not contain slashes or and the leading letter of the file name should not be a period Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 gt gt For example the following screen text shows the download procedure for a runtime code file Select gt x Xmodem Receiving Start Image downloaded to buffer R untime D iagnostic L oader Warning you sure what you are doing Update Image File r Runtime Image Filename run_1013 Updating file system File system updated Press any key to continue B 3 UPGRADING FIRMWARE VIA THE SERIAL PORT 16 To set the new downloaded file as the startup file use the S et Startup File menu option 17 When you have finished downloading code files use the C hange Baudrate menu option to change the baud rate of the switch s serial connectio
187. TigerSwitch 10 100 24 Port Layer 3 Switch 904089090909000909090 24 10BASE T 100BASE TX auto MDI MDI X ports Optional 1000BASE T or 1000BASE X GBIC modules 8 8 Gbps aggregate bandwidth Non blocking switching architecture Support for redundant power unit Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Supports up to 6 static or dynamic trunks Layer 2 3 4 CoS support through four priority queues Full support for VLANs with GVRP IGMP multicast filtering and snooping Layer 3 routing for unicast and multicast traffic Authentication via RADIUS ACLs or IEEE 802 1x Manageable via console Web SNMP RMON 6 SMC Management Guide N etworks SMC6724L3 TigerSwitch 10 100 Management Guide From SMC s Tiger line of feature rich workgroup LAN solutions SMC Networks 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 October 2003 Phone 949 679 8000 Pub 1502000337004 Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or oth erwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright O 2003 by SMC Netwotks Inc 38 Tesla Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Printed in Taiwan Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and TigerSwitch is a trademar
188. WITCH CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 119 Console config if tip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 4 216 Console config 1f exit Console config tip default gateway 192 168 1 254 4 218 Console config Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically configured by these services Web Click IP General Routing Interface Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset Routing Interface VLAN 1 IP Address Mode DHCP IP Address 2 Subnet Mask Set IP Configuration Remove IP Address Restart DHCP Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address 3 20 BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart client command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 119 Console config if tip address dhcp 4 216 Console config if Htend Consoletip dhcp restart client 4 98 Console sh
189. Y Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Protocol STP A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point i
190. abilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric e 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation e flowcontrol Supports flow control INTEREACE COMMANDS symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if Hcapabilities 100full Console config if Htcapabilities flo
191. able to locate the port that provides the shortest path back to the source If that path passes through the same port on which the multicast message was received then this router records path information for the concerned multicast group in its routing table and forwards the multicast message on to adjacent routers except for the port through which the message arrived This process eliminates potential loops from the tree and ensures that the shortest path in terms of hop count is always used Configuring Global DVMRP Settings DVMRP is used to route multicast traffic to nodes which have requested a specific multicast service via IGMP This router uses Reverse Path Forwarding RPF to build a shortest path delivery tree that begins at the source and spreads out to reach group members through the network RPF uses three different techniques to dynamically reconfigure the multicast spanning tree broadcasting pruning and grafting 3 223 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 224 Command Usage Broadcasting periodically floods the network with traffic from any active multicast server If IGMP snooping is disabled multicast traffic is flooded to all ports on the router However if IGMP snooping is enabled then the first packet for any source group pair is flooded to all DVMRP downstream neighbors If a packet is received through an interface that the router determines to be the shortest path back to the source based on interface metrics then
192. ackets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address a this sub layer including those that wete discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in
193. act snmp setver Sets the system location string GC 4 92 location 4 31 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE hostname Use this command to specify or modify the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config hostname SMC6724L3 Console config User Access Commands 4 32 The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 13 user authentication v a a remote authentication server page 4 60 and host access aut for specific ports page 4 66 hentication Privileged Exec level Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication GC 4 33 system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the GC 4 34 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS username Use this command to add named users require authentication at login specify or change a user s password or specify that no password is required or specify or change a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level level nopassword password 0 7 password no u
194. age This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config spanning tree priority Use this command to configure the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 4 151 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config
195. ail button for the required entry modify the link settings and click Set Virtual Link Configuration Current Virtual Link Entries Area ID Neighbor Router ID Detail Setting Remove 0 0 0 4 10 1 1 252 Detail F Entry Count 1 Remove Virtual Link Settings Area ID 3 Neighbor Router ID poo Transmit Delay 0 3600 seconds iO Retransmit Interval 0 3600 seconds Bo Hello Interval 1 65535 seconds fio Rtr Dead Interval 0 65535 seconds ao Authentication Type ua y Authentication Key j i Message Digest Key id 0 255 i zl CLI This example configures a virtual link from the ABR adjacent to area 0 0 0 4 through a transit area to the neighbor router 10 1 1 252 at the other end of the link which is adjacent to the backbone Console config router area 0 0 0 0 virtual link 10 1 1 252 4 260 Console config router 3 205 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Network Area Addresses OSPF protocol broadcast messages i e Link State Advertisements or LSAs are restricted by area to limit their impact on network performance A large network should be split up into separate OSPF areas to increase network stability and to reduce protocol traffic by summarizing routing information into more compact messages Each router in an area shares the same view of the network topology including area links route summaries for directly connected areas and external links to other areas Comm
196. al the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled 4 17 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line password thresh 4 18 Use this command to set the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh 7hreshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line LINE COMMANDS Related Commands silent time 4 19 silent time Use this command to set the amount of time the management console is inaccessi
197. along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this 3 103 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN awate or VLAN unawate network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging tagged frames VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware tagged untagged frames frames ARMEA _1 VA VA vu VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you
198. ample Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets Console Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 0 0 INTEREACE COMMANDS show interfaces switchport Use this command to display the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport zterface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6
199. and Usage e Use the Network Area Address Configuration page to specify an Area ID and the corresponding network address range Each area identifies a logical group of OSPF routers that actively exchange LSAs to ensure that they share an identical view of the network topology Each area must be connected to a backbone area This area passes routing information between other areas in the autonomous system The default value 0 0 0 0 is used as the Area ID for the backbone All routers must be connected to the backbone either directly or through a virtual link if a direct physical connection is not possible e An area initially configured via the Network Area Address Configuration page is set as a normal area or transit area by default A normal area can send and receive external Link State Advertisements LSAs If necessary you can use the Area Configuration page to configure an area as a stubby area that cannot send or receive external LSAs or a not so stubby area NSSA that can import external route information into its area page 3 192 e An area must be assigned a range of subnetwork addresses This area and the corresponding address range forms a routing interface and can be configured to aggregate LSAs from all of its subnetwork addresses and exchange this information with other routers in the network page 3 196 3 206 IP ROUTING Command Attributes IP Address Address of the interfaces to add to the area e Netma
200. and to display global configuration settings for RIP Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show rip globals RIP Process Enabled Update Time in Seconds 30 Number of Route Change 0 Number of Queries 1 Console Field Description RIP Process Indicates if RIP has been enabled or disabled Update Time in The interval at which RIP advertises known toute Seconds information Default 30 seconds Number of Route Changes Number of Queries Number of times routing information has changed Number of router database queries received by this router show ip rip Use this command to display information about interfaces configured for RIP Syntax show ip rip configuration status peer configuration Shows RIP configuration settings for each interface e status Shows the status of routing messages on each interface e peer Shows information on neighboring routers along with information about the last time a route update was received the RIP version used by the neighbor and the status of routing messages received from this neighbor 4 242 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip rip configuration Interface SendMode ReceiveMode Poison Authentication 10 1 0 253 riplCompatible RIPvl0rv2 SplitHorizon noAuthentication 10 1 1 253 riplCompatible RIPvl0rv2 SplitHorizon noAuthentication Console show ip rip status Interface R
201. annel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if tlacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config exit Consol Mac e show interfaces status port channel 1 address Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Capabilities Flow control status Current status Created by Link status Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type Member Ports Console Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100tx 00 00 e8 Auto 10half lacp Up Eth1 11 00 00 0b 10full 100half 100full Disabled None Eth1 12 Eth1 13 ADDRESS TABLE COMMANDS Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Command Function Mode Page mac address table Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 141 static clear Removes any learned entries from the PE 4 142 mac address table forwarding database dynamic show Displays entries in the bridge forwarding PE 4 143 mac address table database mac address table Sets the aging time of the address
202. anning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology chang
203. are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 At the Username prompt enter admin 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level 2 5 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt
204. ast Ethernet interface 1 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet interface 8 Mbps e Due to a switch chip limitation the input rate limit can only be enabled or disabled for all interfaces In other words the rate limit input and no rate limit input commands apply globally to the entire switch However specific rates apply to the specified interface e The output rate limit can be enabled or disabled for specific interfaces Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 10 Console config if LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link 1 e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 4 119 port channel configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC 4 138 Dynamic Configura
205. ate routes learned from other protocols Use the no form to remove a summaty address Syntax summary address swmmary address netmask no summary address summary address netmask summary address Summary address covering a range of addresses netmask Network mask for the summary route Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting Disabled Command Usage e An Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR can redistribute routes learned from other protocols by advertising an aggregate route into all attached autonomous systems This router supports up 16 Type 5 summary routes Example This example creates a summary address for all routes contained in 192 168 x x Console config router summary address 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 Console config router Related Commands area range 4 251 4 253 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE redistribute Use this command to import external routing information from other routing domains i e protocols into the autonomous system Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax redistribute rip static metric zzetric value metric type ype valne no redistribute rip static metric 1etric value metric type sype value rip External routes will be imported from the Routing Information Protocol into this Autonomous System e static Static routes will be imported into this Autonomous System metric value Metric assigned to all external
206. ation types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 94 snmp server enable traps Use this command to enable this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax snmp server enable traps authentication link up down no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down e authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure traps link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down traps The link up down trap can only be enabled disabled via the CLL Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down 4 94 SNMP COMMANDS notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server hos
207. awate devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 113 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 3 111 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 112 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 114 Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Port Port identifier Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN ot CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least o
208. bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 75 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Statistics Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface Pon fi y Trunk Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets D Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded 0 Recemwed Unknown 0 Packets i Packets y Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Multicast Transmit Unicast Packets 0 Packets 2420 Transmit Broadcast 47 Transmit Discarded 0 Packets Transmit Errors Packets Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors OlLate Collisions FCS Errors O Excessive Collisions Single Collision Frames Internal MAC Transmit Errors Multiple Collision Frames SGE Test Errors D Carrier Sense Errors O Frames Too Long Deferred Transmissions Internal MAC Recei
209. base nssa external ink state id show ip ospf area id database nssa external ink state id adv router 7p address show ip ospf area id database nssa external nk state id self originate ink state id show ip ospf area id database router nk state id show ip ospf area id database router adv router address show ip ospf area id database router self originate k state id show ip ospf area id database self originate izk state id show ip ospf area id database summary nk state id show ip ospf area id database summary nk state id adv routet 7p address show ip ospf area id database summary nk state id self originate ink state id area id Area defined for which you want to view LSA information This item must be entered in the form of an IP address e adv router IP address of the advertising router If not entered information about all advertising routers is displayed e ip address IP address of the specified router If no address is entered information about the local router is displayed e asbr summary Shows information about Autonomous System Boundary Router summary LSAs link state id The network portion described by an LSA The link state id entered should be An IP network number for Type 3 Summary and External LSAs A Router ID for Router Network and Type 4 AS Summary LSAs 4 273 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Also note that when an Type
210. before this entry will be aged out The default is 260 seconds V1Timer The time remaining until the switch assumes that there are no longer any IGMP Version 1 members on the IP subnet attached to this interface The default is 400 seconds 4 214 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS IP Interface Commands There are no IP addresses assigned to this router by default You must manually configure a new address to manage the router over your network or to connect the router to existing IP subnets You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment if routing is not enabled This section includes commands for configuring IP interfaces the Address Resolution Protocol ARP and Proxy ARP These commands are used to connect subnetworks to the enterprise network Command Group Function Page Basic IP Configures the IP address for interfaces and the 4 215 Configuration gateway router Address Resolution Configures static dynamic and proxy ARP service 4 221 Protocol ARP Basic IP Configuration Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 216 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this GC 4 218 router can reach other subnetworks show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 219 show ip redirects
211. ber of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 34 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the SMC6724L3 1 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console COMMAND LINE INTEREACE Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the SMC6724L3 1 Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Password privileged level password Console Configuration Commands Configuration commands ate privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes e Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as ho
212. bits per character that LC 4 20 are interpreted and generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 21 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 22 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per LC 4 23 byte show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE 4 23 PE These commands only apply to the serial port 4 13 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE line 4 14 Use this command to identify a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 23 show users 4 51 LINE COMMANDS login Use this command to enable password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the use
213. ble after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 18 4 19 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE databits 4 20 Use this command to set the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits e 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line tdatabits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 21 LINE COMMANDS parity Use this command
214. bled Auto Cost Mbps _ This is the reference bandwidth used to calculate the default cost metric for each interface To change the cost metric for any interface use the OSP Interface Configuration screen Default 100 1 These items are read only 2 CLI These items ate configured with the default information originate command page 248 3 189 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 190 SPF Hold Time seconds The hold time between making two consecutive shortest path first SPF calculations Range 0 65535 Default 10 Area Numbers The number of OSPF areas configured on this router Default Route Information Originate Default Route 2 _ Generates a default external route into an autonomous system Note that the AS Boundary Router field must be enabled and the Advertise Default Route field properly configured Default Disabled Advertise Default Route The router can advertise a default external route into the autonomous system AS Options NotAlways Always Default NotAlways Always The router will advertise itself as a default external route for the AS even if a default external route does not actually exist NotAlways It can only advertise a default external route into the AS if it has been configured to import external routes via RIP or static configuration and such a route is known See Redistributing External Routes on page 210 External Metric Type 7
215. bled Command Usage e This command can be used to advertise routes between areas If routes are set to be advertised the router will issue a Type 3 summary LSA for each address range specified with this command e This router supports up 64 summary routes for area ranges Example This example creates a summary address for all area routes in the range of 10 2 x x Console config router tarea 10 2 0 0 range 10 2 0 0 255 255 0 0 advertise Console config router 4 251 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE area default cost 4 252 Use this command to specify a cost for the default summary route sent into a stub or not so stubby area NSSA from an Area Border Router ABR Use the no form to remove the assigned default cost Syntax area area id default cost cost no area area 1d default cost e area id Identifier for a stub or NSSA in the form of an IP address cost Cost for the default summary route sent to a stub or NSSA Range 0 65535 Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting 1 Command Usage If you enter this command for a normal area it will changed to a stub e If the default cost is set to 0 the router will not advertise a default route into the attached stub or NSSA Example Console config router tarea 10 3 9 0 default cost 10 Console config router Related Commands area stub 4 257 IP ROUTING COMMANDS summary address Use this command to aggreg
216. c Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 25 GENERAL COMMANDS configure Use this command to activate Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration and VLAN Database Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config Related Commands end 4 29 show history Use this command to show the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands 4 27 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec M
217. c is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 143 MULTICAST FILTERING IGMP Query Layer 2 or 3 IGMP Query can only be enabled globally at Layer 2 but can be enabled for individual VLAN interfaces at Layer 3 page 3 144 However note that Layer 2 query is disabled if Layer 3 query is enabled Configuring IGMP Snooping Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these device
218. c known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules e Source Destination MAC Source or destination MAC address Source Destination Mask Binary mask for source or destination MAC address Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet I formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet IT packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets 3 47 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 48 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 Or enter a base address and a hexadecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name jerry Action Source Source Destination Destination Ethernet Packet Remove MAC Mask MAC Mask Type Format Action Permit y Source MAC Source Mask Destination MAC
219. can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be 3 104 VLAN CONFIGURATION used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements ate propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on ends
220. cate protocol messages passed between neighboring routers and this router when using message digest MD5 authentication The Xey d is an integer from 1 255 and the key is an alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long If MD5 authentication is used on a virtual link then it must be enabled on all routers within an autonomous system and the key identifier and key must also be the same for all routers Command Mode Router Configuration 4 261 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 262 Default Setting area id None router id None hello interval 10 seconds retransmit interval 5 seconds transmit delay 1 second dead interval 40 seconds authentication key None message digest key None Command Usage e All areas must be connected to a backbone area 0 0 0 0 to maintain routing connectivity throughout the autonomous system If it not possible to physically connect an area to the backbone you can use a virtual link A virtual link can provide a logical path to the backbone for an isolated area You can specify up to 32 virtual links on this router e Any area disconnected from the backbone must include the transit area ID and the router ID for a virtual link neighbor that is adjacent to the backbone e This router supports up 64 virtual links Example This example creates a virtual link using the defau parameters ts for all optional Conso Conso Conso e config router network 10 4 0 0 0 255 e
221. ce configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 4 55 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE delete Use this command to delete a file or image Syntax delete filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfe cannot be deleted Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memoty Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 57 4 56 FLASH FILE COMMANDS dir Use this command to display a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode f enamel The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e File information is shown below Column Heading Description file name The name of the file fil
222. ce vlan v an id e group address IP address of the multicast group e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays information for all known groups Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command displays information for multicast groups learned via IGMP not static groups If the switch receives an IGMP Version 1 Membership Report it sets a timer to note that there are Version 1 hosts present which are members of the group for which it heard the report If there are Version 1 hosts present for a particular group the switch will ignore any Leave Group messages that it receives for that group 4 213 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following shows the IGMP groups currently active on VLAN 1 Console show ip igmp groups vlan 1 GroupAddress InterfaceVlan Lastreporter Uptime Expire VlTimer 234 5 6 8 i TOSS b 7068 220 0 Console Field Description GroupAddress IP multicast group address with subscribers directly attached or downstream from this switch InterfaceVlan The interface on this switch that has received traffic directed to the multicast group address Lastreporter The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for this multicast group address on this interface If no membership report has been received this object has the value 0 0 0 0 Uptime The time elapsed since this entry was created Expire The time remaining
223. cedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if 4 192 PRIORITY COMMANDS show map ip port Use this command to show the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 187 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 188 4 193 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show map ip precedence Use this command to show the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence 70 1erface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged
224. ceived Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Received Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to Packets be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown The number of packets received via the interface which Packets were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent PORT CONFIGURATION Parameter Description Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of p
225. ces status ethernet 1 13 Information of Eth 1 13 Basic information Port type 100tx Mac address 00 30 f1 47 58 46 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Current status Link status Down Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console 4 128 PORT CONFIGURATION Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled yo
226. ch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 3 23 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and Web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 22 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test This code also provides a facility to upload firmware files to the system directly through the console port See Upgrading Firmware via the Serial Port on page B 1 Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and ope
227. ch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOT see Setting an IP Address on page 2 6 Notes 1 This switch supports four concurrent Telnet sessions 2 Each VLAN group can be assigned its own IP interface address page 2 6 You can manage the switch via any of these addresses After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a Web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software BASIC CONFIGURATION Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level
228. ch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status P Precedence y CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config tmap ip precedence 4 189 Console config LASS OF SERVICE INFIGU ION CLASS OF SERVICE Co RATIO Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control 6 Internetwork Control 5 Critical 4 Flash Overrid
229. classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs 3 108 The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time VLAN CONFIGURATION Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID ea Up Time at Creation 0 dO hO min7 s Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports Unitl Por a Unitl Port2 Unitl Pong y Uniti Port y Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled
230. config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config show ip igmp snooping Use this command to show the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping Parameters on page 137 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Query time out 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console 4 199 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show mac address table multicast Use this command to show known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan v an id user igmp snooping e vlan id VLAN ID 1 to 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type Console 4 200 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Fun
231. config 1if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE 4 172 PE show interfaces Displays status for the specified VLAN NE 4 128 status vlan interface PE show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational NE 4 131 switchport status of an interface PE show vlan Use this command to show VLAN information Syntax show vlan id v an id name v an name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 172 VLAN COMMANDS Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Ethl 1 Ethl 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Ethl 6 Ethl 7 Ethl 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Eth1 25 Eth1 26 Console Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Command F
232. config if flowcontrol Console config if no negotiation Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 121 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 122 shutdown Use this command to disable an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax shutdown no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if 4 125 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport broadcast packet rate 4 126 Use this command to configure broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 500 packets per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped e This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control
233. connected to end nodes via shared media that will be assigned to a specific subnet then you must create a router interface for each VLAN that will support routing The router interface consists of an IP address and subnet mask This interface address defines both the network number to which the router interface is attached and the router s host number on that network In other words a router interface address defines the network and subnetwork numbers of the segment that is connected to that interface and allows you to send IP packets to or from the router 3 155 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH e Before you configure any network interfaces on this router you should first create a VLAN for each unique user group or for each network application and its associated users Then assign the ports associated with each of these VLANs Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes IP Address Mode Specifies whether the IP address for this interface is statically assigned or obtained from a network address server Options Static DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol BOOTP Boot Protocol Default Static If Static address type is selected then you must also specify whether the IP address is the primary IP address on the VLAN or a secondary IP address An interface can have only one primary IP address but can have multiple secondary IP addresses In other words you will need to specify secondary a
234. connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port Command Attributes Basie Configuration of Global Settings Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the 3 92 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in s
235. cp relay server Use this command to specify the addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the switch s DHCP relay agent Use the no form to clear all addresses Syntax ip dhcp relay server address address2 address3 no ip dhcp relay server address IP address of DHCP server Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Usage Guidelines e You must specify the IP address for at least one DHCP server Otherwise the switch s DHCP relay agent will not forward client requests to a DHCP server To start DHCP relay service enter the ip dhcp restart relay command Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip dhcp relay server 10 1 0 99 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart relay 4 99 4 101 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE DHCP Server Command Function Mode Page service dhcp Enables the DHCP server feature on this GC 4 103 switch ip dhcp Specifies IP addresses that a DHCP server GC 4 104 excluded address should not assign to DHCP clients ip dhcp pool Configures a DHCP address pool on a DHCP GC 4 104 Server network Configures the subnet number and mask for a DC 4 105 DHCP address pool default router Specifies the default router list fora DHCP DC 4 106 client domain name Specifies the domain name for a DHCP client DC 4 107 dns server Specifies the Domain Name Server DNS
236. ction Mode Page ip igmp snooping Allows this device to act as the querier for GC 4 201 querier IGMP snooping ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 202 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 203 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 203 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 204 router port expire time ip igmp snooping querier Use this command to enable the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax ip igmp snooping querier no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config 4 201 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip igmp snooping query count Use this command to configure the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier wai
237. d nm 1 ALL y I Enabled I Enabled 20 60 fiooo Hybrid xl CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 119 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 167 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 168 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 169 Console config if switchport gvrp 4 177 Console config if garp timer join 10 4 178 Console config if garp timer leave 90 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 166 Console config if 3 117 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports Downlink Ports DODO x OOO Secondary VLAN private ports Enabling Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Web Click Private VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status
238. d connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 300 quiet period 350 tx period 300 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Mode Authorized 1 disabled ForceAuthorized n a 2 disabled ForceAuthorized n a 25 disabled ForceAuthorized yes 26 enabled Auto yes 4 73 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 802 1X is enabled on port 26 Max request 2 Quiet period 350 Reauth period 300 Tx period 300 Status Unauthorized Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 00 00 00 00 Authenticator State Machine State Connecting Reauth Count 3 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 0 Reauthentication State Machine State In
239. d Autonomous System Boundary Routers ASBR known by this device Field Attributes Destination Identifier for the destination router Next Hop IP address of the next hop toward the destination Cost Link metric for this route Type Router type of the destination either ABR ASBR or both Rte Type Route type either intra area or interarea route INTRA or INTER Area The atea from which this route was learned SPF No The number of times the shortest path first algorithm has been executed for this route Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Border Router Information Border Router Information Destination Next Hop Cost Type RteType Area ID SPF No 10 2 44 5 10 2 44 88 1 ABR INTRA 0 0 0 1 5 10 2 44 5 10 2 44 88 1 ASBR INTER 0 0 0 1 45 Entry Count 2 zil CLI This example shows one router that serves as both the ABR for the local area and the ASBR for the autonomous system Console show ip ospf border routers 4 272 Destination Next Hop Cost Type RteType Area SPF No 10 2 44 5 10 2 44 88 a ABR INTRA 0 0 0 1 5 10 2 44 5 10 2 44 88 ASBR INTER a oS SE 1 5 Console 3 216 IP ROUTING Displaying Information on Neighbor Routers You can display about neighboring routers on each interface within an OSPF area Field Attributes ID Neighbor s router ID e Priority Neighbor s router priority State OSPF state and identification flag States includ
240. d E ae ate 2 5 Setting Passwords cuicos ii eit eee 2 6 Setting an IP Address id S Posies 2 6 Manual Configuration ooo oooooooocccccconococoo 2 7 Dynamic Configuration 6 cee eee eee 2 8 Enabling SNMP Management Access 000000000 ee 2 9 Community Strings esseen ce cece 2 9 Trap Receivers ss esot yeas pu Jeanie Sas Je bee Peas da 2 11 Saving Configuration Settings 0 0 cece eee eee 2 11 Managing System Files union ed See 2 12 Configuring the Switch ooooooooooo o o 3 1 Using the Web Interface sna ejenn eee eee 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 000 cee eee roo 3 3 HomePage vc nae sabi wind Sod pho etd pace a ce 3 3 Configuration Options 2 6 6 6 eee eee 3 4 Panel DISPO Ree es 3 4 Mate Mens 25 08 Stone r nd a Dida Pals AA 3 5 Basic Configuration 22 snes eles Saket ala bo ae ee be 3 12 Displaying System Information 00000 ee eee eee 3 12 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions 3 14 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities oooo oo o o 3 16 Setting the Switch s IP Address 0 cece eee eee 3 17 Manual Configuration 0 6 0 6 0 c cee eee eee 3 19 vii CONTENTS Using DHCP BOOTP 0 0 3 20 Managing Firmware 6 eee eee 3 22 Downloading System Software from a Server 3 22 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 23 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Servet 3 24 Se
241. d authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 72 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS authentication dotlx default Sets the default authentication server type Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication dotix default radius no authentication dotlx Default Setting RADIUS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config authentication dotlx default radius Console config dotlx default Sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Syntax dot1x default Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx default Console config 4 67 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dotlx max req Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotlx max req count no dotlx max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx max req 2 Console config dot1x port control Sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dotix port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dotlx port control e auto Requires a dotlx aware connected client to be authori
242. d from the multicast routing table when the router determines that there are no group members or downstream routers or when a prune message is received from a downstream router 4 303 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip pim dense mode Console show ip pim interface Vlan 1 is up PIM is enabled mode is Dense Internet address is 10 1 0 253 Hello time interval is 30 sec trigger hello time interval is 5 sec Hello holdtime is 105 sec Join Prune holdtime is 210 sec Graft retry interval is 3 sec max graft retries is 2 DR Internet address is 10 1 0 253 neighbor count is 0 Console ip pim hello interval 4 304 Use this command to configure the frequency at which PIM hello messages ate transmitted Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip pim hello interval seconds no pim hello interval seconds Interval between sending PIM hello messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage Hello messages ate sent to neighboring PIM routers from which this device has received probes and are used to verify whether or not these neighbors are still active members of the multicast tree Example Console config if ip pim hello interval 60 Console config if MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS ip pim hello holdtime Use this command to configure the interval to wait for
243. d network mask select whether or not to advertise the summary route to other areas and then click Apply Area Range Configuration Current Area Range Entries Area ID Range Network Range Netmask Advertising Remove 0001 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Advertise 310 Entry Count 1 Remove Area Range Settings Area ID Range Network Advertising Advertise y Range Netmask Set 3 197 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example summarizes all the routes for area 1 Note that the default for the area range command is to advertise the route summaty The configured summary route is shown in the list of information displayed for area 1 Console config router tarea 0 0 0 1 range 10 1 1 0 20904 290 299 0 4 255 Console config router end Console show ip ospf Routing Process with ID 10 1 1 253 Supports only single TOS TOSO route Number of area in this router is 4 Area 0 0 0 0 BACKBONE Number of interfaces in this area is 0 SPF algorithm executed 47 times Area 0 0 0 1 Number of interfaces in this area is 3 SPF algorithm executed 14 times Area ranges are 255 255 255 0 24 Active Console Configuring OSPF Interfaces You should specify a routing interface for any local subnet that needs to communicate with other network segments located on this router or elsewhere in the network First configure a VLAN for each subnet that will be directly connected to this router assign IP interfaces to each VLAN e on
244. ddresses if more than one IP subnet can accessed via this interface If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the address server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the router for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values include the IP address and subnet mask IP Address Address of the VLAN interface Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods e Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets 3 156 IP ROUTING Web Click IP General Routing Interface Specify an IP interface for each VLAN that will support routing to other subnets First specify a primary address and click Set IP Configuration If you need to assign secondary addresses enter these addresses one at a time and click Set IP Configuration after entering each address Routing Interface VLAN fi IP Address Mode Static Primary y IP Address fioio253 Subnet Mask 2552552550 Set IP Configuration Remove IP Address Restart DHCP CLI This example sets a primary IP address for VLAN 1 and then adds a secondary IP address for a different subnet also attached to this router interface Console config interface vlan 1 Console config 1f tip address 10 1 0 253 255 255 255 0 4 216 Console config if ip address 10 1 9 253 255 255 255 0 secondary Console config if Address Resolution Protocol
245. ded emergencies 0 System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 4 38 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config clear logging Use this command to clear messages from the log buffer Syntax clear logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory 1 e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console Related Commands show logging 4 40 4 39 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show logging 4 40 Use this command to display the logging configuration along with any system and event messages stored in memory Syntax show logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory 1 e permanent memoty e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command shows the following information e Syslog logging Whether
246. dges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Example Console config interface ethernet SNP5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point Console config if SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree protocol migration Use this command to re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console config interface ethernet SNP5 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration Console config if 4 159 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show spanning tree Use this command to show the spanning tree configuration Syntax show spanning tree interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage
247. ding an IGMP query and starting a timer based on this command If no reports are received before the timer expires the group is deleted This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 10 seconds Console config if ip igmp last memb query interval 10 Console config if ip igmp version Use this command to configure the IGMP version used on an interface Use the no form of this command to restore the default Syntax ip igmp version 1 2 no ip igmp version e 1 IGMP Version 1 e 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 4 210 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e All routers on the subnet must support the same version However the multicast hosts on the subnet may support either IGMP version 1 or 2 e The switch must be set to version 2 to enable the ip igmp max resp interval page 4 208 Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 on the selected interface Console config if ip igmp version 1 Console config if show ip igmp interface Use this command to show the IGMP configuration for a specific VLAN interface or for all interfaces Syntax show ip igmp interface vlan v an id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 De
248. dress table interface ethernet 1 1 4 143 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Time 10 1000000 400 seconds CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 4 144 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w 3 87 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 88 STA uses a distrib
249. e Down Connection down Attempt Connection down but attempting contact non broadcast networks Init Have received Hello packet but communications not yet established Two way Bidirectional communications established ExStart Initializing adjacency between neighbors Exchange Database descriptions being exchanged Loading LSA databases being exchanged Full Neighboring routers now fully adjacent Identification flags include D Dynamic neighbor S Static neighbor DR Designated router BDR Backup designated router e Address IP address of this interface 3 217 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Neighbor Information Neighbor Information ID Priority State Address 10 2 44 5 1 FULUDR 10 2 44 88 10 2 44 5 2 FULUBDR 10 2 44 88 Entry Count 2 CLI This shows a designated router and backup designated router as neighbors Console show ip ospf neighbor 4 282 ID Pri State Address OS 10 2 44 5 1 FUEL DR 10 2 44 88 10 2 44 6 2 FULL BDR 10 2 44 88 Console Multicast Routing 3 218 This router can route multicast traffic to different subnetworks using either Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP or Protocol Independent Multicasting Dense Mode PIM DM These protocols flood multicast traffic downstream and calculate the shortest path source rooted delivery tree between each source and destination host g
250. e The interval in seconds during which no more than two bridge configuration protocol data units shall be transmitted by this node Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root Bridge ID 32768 00004BCDO000 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d O h O min 35 s 32768 D000ABCDO000 CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Bridge group information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Transmission limit Path Cost Method Last topology changes time sec 20 15 32768 0000ABCD0000 0 0 9 435571 3 i long Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network 3 91 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports
251. e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects ptivate with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Note If you do not intend to utilize SNMP we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access to the switch is disabled To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community sting mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw Console config snmp server community private Console config BASIC CONFIGURATION Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server ho
252. e Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command COMMAND GROUPS Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below addresses displays current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port 4 13 and Telnet including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode 4 24 restarting the system or quitting the CLI System Controls system logs system passwords user name 4 31 Management browser management options and a variety of other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 53 Authentication Configures logon access using local or RADIUS 4 60 authentication also configures IEEE 802 1x port access control Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames based on address 4 74 protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures 4 90 community access strings and trap managers DHCP Configures DHCP client relay and server functi
253. e 3 Flash 2 Immediate 1 Priority 0 Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP Precedence settings apply to all interfaces 3 127 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select a port or trunk from the Interface field Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority Interface Select IP Precedence Priority Table Class of Service Value G Port y C Trun IP Precedence 0 CoS 0 IP Precedence 2 CoS 2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS 5 IP Precedence 6 CoS 6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Restore Default 007 Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes apply to the all interfaces on the switch CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if end C
254. e 0 0 cece eee eee 4 Pate litt en aoe ints IA Bical ES he RC nee da 4 Link Aggregation Commands 0 6c eee ee 4 chatinel otoup Lata iin Beare oa in doe Bek Aad oad LA 4 DACP yd A id a 4 Address Table Commands oooocococooocccccccaco eens 4 mac address table static ooooooooooommmmmcr romo 4 clear mac address table dynamic 0 00 0000 4 show mac address table 1 0 cece eee eee 4 mac address table aging time 1 0 6 eee eee 4 show mac address table aging time 0 000000 4 Spanning Tree Commands 0 6 0 ccc eee eee 4 SPaNNiN the aia 4 spanning tree mode spisas 6 eee ee as 4 spanning tree forward time 6 6 eee ee eee 4 spanning tree hello time 6 cee eee eee 4 spanning tree Max age siga eee eee 4 spanning tree priority 66 eee eee 4 spanning tree pathcost method 00000 e eee 4 spanning tree transmission limit 00 e eee eee 4 SPAnming tree COST eee eee 4 spanning tree port priority 6 eee eee 4 spanning tree edge port 6 6 eee eee eee 4 spanning tree portfast 0 eee eee 4 spanning tree link type 2 0 0 eee eee 4 spanning tree protocol migration 6 00 e eee eee 4 show spanning tree 6 eee ee eee 4 VLAN Commands eases esaat pd a E 4 Editing VLAN Groups 2 0 p AE AA ce cece 4 vian database tostada dll Magnets a 4 VAR sisted eect ed rs st ene Ren ach eee eae ce 4 Configuring VLAN In
255. e Limit Input Output Rate Limit Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status for all interfaces or set the Output Rate Limit Status for selected interfaces then set the rate limit for individual interfaces and click Apply Input Rate Limit Port Configuration Input Rate Limit Status Enabled y Port Input Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 60 N Output Rate Limit Port Configuration alw Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 enebied oo F on TD A win FTT ao ny Oo Mn TRUNK CONFIGURATION CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 60 Mbps Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 119 Console config if rate limit input 60 4 136 Console config if rate limit output 60 Console config if Trunk Configuration You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual ageregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to six trunks at a time The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negot
256. e for a DHCP client This file should placed on the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server specified with the next server command Use the no form to delete the boot image name Syntax bootfile ename no bootfile filename Name of the file that is used as a default boot image 4 109 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Example Console config dhcp bhootfile wme bat Console config dhcp Related Commands next server 4 109 netbios name server Use this command to configure NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service WINS name servers that are available to Microsoft DHCP clients Use the no form to remove the NetBIOS name server list Syntax netbios name server address1 address2 no netbios name server e address Specifies IP address of primary NetBIOS WINS name server address2 Specifies IP address of alternate NetBIOS WINS name server Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Usage Guidelines Servers are listed in order of preference starting with address as the most preferred server 4 110 DHCP CoMMANDS Example Console config dhcp netbios name server 10 1 0 33 10 1 0 34 Console config dhcp Related Commands netbios node type 4 111 netbios node type Use this command to configure the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients Use the no form to remove the NetBIOS node
257. e metric no ip dvmrp metric interface metric Metric used to select the best reverse path Range 1 31 Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage The DVMRP interface metric is used to choose the best reverse path when there are multiple paths to the same upstream destination The lower cost path is the preferred path Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip dvmrp metric 2 Console config if 4 297 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear ip dvmrp route Use this command to clear all dynamic toutes learned by DVMRP Command Mode Privileged Exec Example As shown below this command clears everything from the route table except for the default route Console clear ip dvmrp route clear all ip dvmrp route Console show ip dvmrp route Source Mask Upstream_nbr Interface Metric UpTime Expire 10 EG DAR a 299 209 299 0 10 1 0 253 vlanl 1 1840 0 Console show router dvmrp 4 298 Use this command to display the global DVMRP configuration settings Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the global DVMRP settings described in the preceding pages e Admin Status router dvmrp page 4 291 Probe Interval page 4 292 e Nbr Expire page 4 293 e Minimum Flash Update Interval page 4 294 Prune Lifetime page 4 294 e Route Report page 4 293 Default Gateway page 4 295 e Metric o
258. e primary interface and one or more secondary interfaces and then use the OSPF Network Area Address Configuration page to assign an interface address range to an OSPF area After assigning a routing interface to an OSPF area you need to use the OSPF Interface Configuration page to configure the interface specific parameters used by OSPF to select the designated router control the timing of link state advertisements set the cost used to select preferred paths and specify the method used to authenticate routing messages 3 198 IP ROUTING Field Attributes OSPF Interface List VLAN ID The VLAN to which an IP interface has been assigned Interface IP The IP interface associated with the selected VLAN e Area ID The area to which this interface has been assigned Designated Router Designated router for this area Backup Designated Router Designated backup router for this area Entry Count The number of IP interfaces assigned to this VLAN Note This router supports up 64 OSPF interfaces Detail Interface Configuration e VLAN ID The VLAN corresponding to the selected interface Rtr Priority Sets the interface priority for this router Range 0 255 Default 1 A designated router DR and backup designated router BDR is elected for each OSPF area based on Router Priority The DR forms an active adjacency to all other routers in the area to exchange routing topology information
259. e rather than maintaining a separate multicast routing table as with DVMRP PIM Sparse Mode is designed for networks where the probability of a multicast client is low such as on a Wide Area Network PIM Dense Mode is designed for networks where the probability of a multicast client is high and frequent flooding of multicast traffic can be justified Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Routing Information Protocol RIP The RIP protocol seeks to find the shortest route to another device by minimizing the distance vector or hop count which serves as a rough estimate of transmission cost RIP 2 is a compatible upgrade to RIP It adds useful capabilities for subnet routing authentication and multicast transmissions Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Glossary 6 GLOSSAR
260. e type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes 4 57 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir file name file type startup size byte diag_0060 Boot Rom image Y 111360 run_01642 Operation Code N 1074304 run_0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File N 2574 startup Config File Y 2710 Total free space 0 Console whichboot Use this command to display which files were booted when the system powered up Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte diag_0060 Boot Rom image Y 111360 run_0200 Operation Code Y 1083008 startup Config File ag 2710 Console 4 58 FLASH FILE COMMANDS boot system Use this command to specify the file or image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code The colon is required filename Name of the configu
261. ea Common atea the virtual link crosses to reach the target router Transmit Delay Estimated transmit delay in seconds on the virtual link Timer intervals Configuration settings for timer intervals including Hello Dead and Retransmit Related Commands area virtual link 4 260 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Multicast Routing Commands This router uses IGMP snooping and query to determine the ports connected to downstream multicast hosts and to propagate this information back up through the multicast tree to ensure that requested services are forwarded through each intermediate node between the multicast server and its hosts and also to filter traffic from all of the other interfaces that do not require these services Multicast routers use snooping and query messages along with a multicast routing protocol to deliver IP multicast packets across different subnetworks This router supports both the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP and Protocol Independent Multicasting PIM Note that you should enable IGMP for any interface that is using multicast routing Command Groups Function Page Static Multicast Configures static multicast router ports 4 285 Routing General Multicast Enables IP multicast routing globally also 4 287 Routing displays the IP multicast routing table created from static and dynamic routing information DVMRP Multicast Configures global and interface settings for 4 290
262. econds dead interval seconds authentication key key message digest key key id md5 k no area area id area id Identifies the transit area for the virtual link The area ID must be in the form of an IP address router id Router ID of the virtual link neighbor This must be an Area Border Router ABR that is adjacent to both the backbone and the transit area at the other end of the virtual link e authentication Specifies the authentication mode If no optional parameters follow this keyword then plain text authentication is used along with the password specified by the authentication key If message digest authentication is specified then the message digest key and md5 parameters must also be specified If the null option is specified then no authentication is performed on any OSPF routing protocol messages message digest Specifies message digest MD5 authentication e null Indicates that no authentication is used e hello interval seconds Specifies the transmit delay between sending hello packets Setting the hello interval to a smaller value can reduce the delay in detecting topological changes but will increase the routing traffic This value must be the same for all routers attached IP ROUTING COMMANDS to an autonomous system Range 1 65535 seconds Default 10 seconds retransmit interval seconds Specifies the interval at which the ABR retransmits link state advertisements LSA over the vir
263. ed with the version command Global RIPv1 RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets Global RIPv2 RIPv2 packets Command Usage e Use this command to override the global setting specified by the RIP version command 4 236 IP ROUTING COMMANDS e You can specify the receive version based on these options Use none if you do not want to add any dynamic entries to the routing table for an interface For example you may only want to allow static routes for a specific interface Use 1 or 2 if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or RIPv2 respectively Use 1 2 if some routers in the local network are using RIPv2 but there are still some older routers using RIPv1 Example This example sets the interface version for VLAN 1 to receive RIPv1 packets Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip rip receive version 1 Console config if Related Commands version 4 235 ip rip send version Use this command to specify a RIP version to send on an interface Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip rip send version none 1 2 v2 broadcast no ip rip send version none Does not transmit RIP updates e 1 Sends only RIPv1 packets 2 Sends only RIPv2 packets e v2 broadcast Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN 4 237 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting The default
264. eed to use the ip dhcp restart client command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart client to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt BASIC CONFIGURATION 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Conso
265. efault Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 11 Information of Eth 1 11 Queue ID Traffic class Console 4 186 PRIORITY COMMANDS Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP UDP class of service GC 4 187 mapping map ip port Maps TCP UDP socket to a class of service IC 4 188 map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service GC 4 189 mapping map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of IC 4 189 setvice map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 191 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 191 show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4 193 show map ip Shows the IP precedence map PE 4 194 precedence show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 195 map ip port Global Configuration Use this command to enable IP port mapping i e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax map ip port no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority 4 187 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console co
266. ejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default 1Q Trunk 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN However note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are sent untagged Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leave All timer VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration GARP GARP GARP Join Leave LeaveAll Acceptable Ingress GVRP Timer Timer Timer Trunk Port PVID Frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi Centi Member Modo Seconds Seconds Seconds 20 1000 60 3000 500 1800 1 fi ALL Enabled Enablea 20 60 frovo Hybrid y N 1 ALL I Enabled Enabled 20 60 fiooo Hybrid 3 3 Tagged I Enabled Enabled 20 60 fiooo Hybond 4 ALL x Enabled I Enabled 20 60 fiooo Hybond 5 f ALL Y M Enabled M Enabled 30 30 2000 Hybri
267. en the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 141 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Usage Interface Indicates a port or trunk e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 3 85 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 86 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on interface port or trunk or MAC address Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by F Interface Port h gt Trunk z I MAC Address nn 7 T VLAN fi Address Table Sort Key Address y Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac ad
268. ent settings Console config router dvmrp 4 291 Console config router probe interval 30 4 292 Console config router nbr timeout 40 4 293 Console config router treport interval 90 4 293 Console config router flash update interval 10 4 294 Console config router prune lifetime 5000 4 294 Console config router default gateway 10 1 0 253 4 295 Console config router end Console show router dvmrp 4 298 Admin Status enable Probe Interval 10 Nbr expire 35 Minimum Flash Update Interval io prune lifetime 7200 route report 60 Default Gateway Console Configuring DVMRP Interface Settings To fully enable DVMRP you need to enable multicast routing globally for the router page 3 219 enable DVMRP globally for the router page 3 223 and also enable DVMRP for each interface that will participate in multicast routing Command Attributes DVMRP Interface Information Interface VLAN interface on this router that has enabled DVMRP Address IP address of this VLAN interface e Metric The metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors e Status Shows that DVMRP is enabled on this interface DVMRP Interface Settings e VLAN Selects a VLAN interface on this router e Metric Sets the metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors 3 227 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 228 e Status Enables or disables DVMRP If DVMRP is enabled
269. er e Next Server The IP address of the next server in the boot process which is typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server Lease Time The duration that an IP address is assigned to a DHCP client Options fixed period Infinite Default 1 day Examples Creating a New Address Pool Web Click DHCP Server Pool Configuration Specify a pool name then click Add Pool Configuration Pool Name mal Add Pool Name Type IP Mask Configure Delete tps Network 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 Configure Delete Entry Count 1 CLI This example adds an address pool and enters DHCP pool configuration mode Console config ip dhcp pool mgr 4 104 Console config dhcp 3 59 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring a Network Address Pool Web Click DHCP Server Pool Configuration Click the Configure button for any entry Click the radio button for Network Enter the IP address and subnet mask for the network pool Configure the optional parameters such as default router and DNS server Then click Apply Pool Name tps gt gt Go back to Pool Configure Network Host IP fi 0 1 0 0 IP Subnet 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Mask Hardware Address th t Client Identifier x lt lt Option gt gt Default Router foros Default Router2 tS optional DNS Sewer fi0234 DNSSewer2 optional Netbios Server hoia oo Netbios Server2 d optional N
270. er running config The system configuration of running snmp SNMP statistics sntp Sntp spanning tree startup config Specify spanning tree The system configuration of starting up system Information of system users Display information about terminal lines version System hardware and software status vlan Switch VLAN Virtual Interface Console show The command show interfaces will display the following information Console gt show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counters status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the 609 S keywords starting with Console show s snmp startup config system Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered Yo
271. erface Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting split horizon Command Usage e Split horizon never propagates routes back to an interface from which they have been acquired e Poison reverse propagates routes back to an interface port from which they have been acquired but sets the distance vector metrics to infinity This provides faster convergence Example This example propagates routes back to the source using poison reverse Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip split horizon poison reverse Console config if 4 239 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip rip authentication key 4 240 Use this command to enable authentication for RIPv2 packets and to specify the key that must be used on an interface Use the no form to prevent authentication Syntax ip rip authentication key key string no ip rip authentication key string A password used for authentication Range 1 16 characters case sensitive Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting No authentication Command Usage e This command can be used to restrict the interfaces that can exchange RIPv2 routing information Note that this command does not apply to RIPv1 e For authentication to function properly both the sending and receiving interface must be configured with the same password Example This example sets an authentication password of small to verify incoming routing me
272. erface Settings You can configure RSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 95 for additional information Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses 3 99 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link
273. ermine if the interface through which a packet is received provides the shortest path back to the source e Dense mode interfaces are subject to multicast flooding by default and are only removed from the multicast routing table when the router determines that there are no group members or downstream routers or when a prune message is received from a downstream router e The interface settings that control the prune and graft messages 1 e prune holdtime should be configured to the same values on all routers throughout the network to allow PIM to function properly Command Attributes e VLAN Selects a VLAN interface on this router PIM DM Protocol Status Enables disables PIM DM Default Disabled e Hello Interval Sets the frequency at which PIM hello messages are transmitted Hello messages ate sent to neighboring PIM routers from which this device has received probes and are used to verify whether or 3 233 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 234 not these neighbors are still active members of the multicast tree Range 1 65535 seconds Default 30 Hello Holdtime Sets the interval to wait for hello messages from a neighboring PIM router before declaring it dead Note that the hello holdtime should be 3 5 times the value of Hello Interval Range 1 65535 seconds Default 105 Trigger Hello Interval Configures the maximum time before transmitting a triggered PIM hello message after the router is rebooted or PIM
274. ers Routing for unicast traffic is supported with the Routing Information Protocol RIP and the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol RIP This protocol uses a distance vector approach to routing Routes are determined on the basis of minimizing the distance vector or hop count which serves as a rough estimate of transmission cost OSPF This approach uses a link state routing protocol to generate a shortest path tree then builds up its routing table based on this tree OSPF produces a more stable network because the participating routers act on network changes predictably and simultaneously converging on the best route more quickly than RIP Address Resolution Protocol The switch uses ARP and Proxy ARP to convert between IP addresses and MAC i e hardware addresses This switch supports conventional ARP which locates the MAC address corresponding to a given IP address This allows the switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the corresponding MAC addresses to forward packets from one hop to the next You can configure either static or dynamic entries in the ARP cache Proxy ARP allows hosts that do not support routing to determine the MAC address of a device on another network or subnet When a host sends an ARP request for a remote network the switch checks to see if it has the best route If it does it sends its own MAC address to the host The host then sends traffic for the remote destination via the s
275. ers spf 4 250 Use this command to configure the hold time between making two consecutive shortest path first SPF calculations Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax timers spf spf holdtime no timers spf Spf holdtime Minimum time between two consecutive SPF calculations Range 0 65535 seconds Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting 10 seconds Command Usage e Setting the SPF holdtime to O means that there is no delay between consecutive calculations Using a low value allows the router to switch to a new path faster but uses more CPU processing time Example Console config router timers spf 20 Console config router IP ROUTING COMMANDS area range Use this command to summarize the routes advertised by an Area Border Router ABR Use the no form to disable this function Syntax area area id range ip address netmask advertise not advertise no area area id range ip address netmask advertise not advertise area id Identifies an area for which the routes are summarized The area ID must be in the form of an IP address p address Base address for the routes to summarize netmask Network mask for the summary route e advertise Advertises the specified address range not advertise The summary is not sent and the routes remain hidden from the rest of the network Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting Disa
276. ertising REC 1723 3 175 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 176 e There are several serious problems with RIP that you should consider First of all RIP version 1 has no knowledge of subnets both RIP versions can take a long time to converge on a new toute after the failure of a link or router during which time routing loops may occur and its small hop count limitation of 15 restricts its use to smaller networks Moreover RIP version 1 wastes valuable network bandwidth by propagating routing information via broadcasts it also considers too few network variables to make the best routing decision Configuring General Protocol Settings RIP is used to specify how routers exchange routing information When RIP is enabled on this router it sends RIP messages to all devices in the network every 30 seconds by default and updates its own routing table when RIP messages are received from other routers To communicate properly with other routers using RIP you need to specify the RIP version used globally by the router as well as the RIP send and receive versions used on specific interfaces page 3 179 Command Usage e When you specify a Global RIP Version any VLAN interface not previously set to a specific Receive or Send Version page 3 179 is set to the following values RIP Version 1 configures previously unset interfaces to send RIPv1 compatible protocol messages and receive either RIPv1 or RIPv2 protocol messages RIP Vers
277. erver challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS uses UDP which only offers best effort delivery Also RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server RADIUS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify one to two authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select USER AUTHENTICATION 1 RADIUS and 2 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then the local user name and password is checked Command Attributes Authe
278. ervices Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP A distance vector style routing protocol used for routing multicast datagrams through the Internet DVMRP combines many of the features of RIP with Reverse Path Forwarding RPF Glossary 1 GLOSSARY Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access tights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessaty VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each
279. es e When using OSPF you must organize your network i e autonomous system into normal stub or not so stubby areas configure the ranges of subnet addresses that can be aggregated by link state advertisements and configure virtual links for areas that do not have direct physical access to the OSFP backbone Toimplement OSPF for a large network you must first organize the network into logical areas to limit the number of OSPF routers that actively exchange Link State Advertisements LSAs You can then define an OSPF interface by assigning an IP interface configured on this router to one of these areas This OSPF interface will send and receive OSPF traffic to neighboring OSPF routers You can further optimize the exchange of OSPF traffic by specifying an area range that covers a large number of subnetwork addresses This is an important technique for limiting the amount of traffic exchanged between Area Border Routers ABRs And finally you must specify a virtual link to any OSPF area that is not physically attached to the OSPF backbone Virtual links can also be used to provide a redundant link between contiguous areas to prevent areas from being partitioned or to merge backbone areas Configuring General Protocol Settings To implement dynamic OSPF routing first assign VLAN groups to each IP subnet to which this router will be attached then use the OSPF General Configuration menu to enable OSPF assign an Router ID to
280. es before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config 4 149 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree hello time Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time ve no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config spanning tree max age Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 4 150 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Us
281. es not accept external routing information Instead an area border router adjacent to a stub can be configured to send a default external backbone ABR stub gt default external route route into the stub for all destinations outside the local area or the autonomous system This route will also be advertised as a single entry point for traffic entering the stub Using a stub can significantly reduce the amount of topology data that has to be exchanged over the network IP ROUTING By default a stub can only pass traffic to other areas in the autonomous system via the default external route However you also can configure an area border router to send Type 3 summary link advertisements into the stub NSSA A not so stubby area NSSA is similar to a stub It blocks most external routing information and can be configured to advertise a single default route for traffic passing between the NSSA and other areas within the autonomous system AS However an NSSA can also import external routes from one or more small routing domains that are not part of the AS such as a RIP domain or locally configured static routes This external AS routing information is generated by the NSSA s ASBR and advertised only within the NSSA By default these routes are not flooded onto the backbone or into any other area by area border routers However the NSSA s ABRs will convert NSSA external LSAs Type 7 into external
282. ess per pool However note that any address specified in a host command must fall within the range of a configured network address pool Example Console config ip dhcp pool R amp D Console config dhcp Related Commands network 4 105 host 4 113 network Use this command to configure the subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool Use the no form to remove the subnet number and mask Syntax network network number mask no network network number The IP address of the DHCP address pool mask The bit combination that identifies the network or subnet and the host portion of the DHCP address pool Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration 4 105 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Usage Guidelines e When a client request is received the switch first checks for a network address pool matching the gateway where the request originated 1 e if the request was forwarded by a relay server If there is no gateway in the client request i e the request was not forwarded by a relay server the switch searches for a network pool matching the interface through which the client request was received It then searches for a manually configured host address that falls within the matching network pool If no manually configured host address is found it assigns an address from the matching network address pool However if no matching address pool is found the request is ignored This command is valid for DHCP netwo
283. et CLI This example redistributes routes learned from RIP as Type 1 external routes Console config router redistribute rip metric type 1 4 254 Console config router 3 211 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 212 Configuring NSSA Settings Use the OSPF NSSA Settings page to configure a not so stubby area NSSA and to control the use of default routes for ABRs and ASBRs or external routes learned from other routing domains and imported v a an ABR For a detailed description of NSSA areas refer to Configuring OSPF Areas on page 3 192 Command Attributes Area ID Identifier for an not so stubby area NSSA Default Information Originate An NSSA ASBR originates and floods Type 7 external LSAs throughout its area for known network destination outside of the AS However you can also configure an NSSA ASBR to generate a Type 7 default route to areas outside of the AS or an NSSA ABR to generate a Type 7 default route to other areas within the AS Default Disabled No Redistribution The Redistribute Configuration page page 3 210 is used to import information from other routing domains or protocols into the AS However when the router is an NSSA ABR you can choose whether or not to accept external routes learned from routers in other OSPF areas into the NSSA Default Enabled Note This router supports up 16 areas either normal transit areas stubs ot NSSAs I
284. et where larger values make the traffic less bursty as host responses are spread out over a larger interval The number of seconds represented by the maximum response interval must be less than the Query Interval Query Interval Configures the frequency at which host query messages are sent Range 1 255 Default 125 seconds Multicast routers send host query messages to determine the interfaces that are connected to downstream hosts requesting a specific multicast service Only the designated multicast router for a subnet sends host query messages which are addressed to the multicast address 224 0 0 1 For IGMP Version 1 the designated router is elected according to the multicast routing protocol that runs on the LAN But for IGMP Version 2 the designated querier is the lowest IP addressed multicast router on the subnet Robustness Variable Specifies the robustness i e expected packet loss for this interface The robustness value is used in calculating the appropriate range for other IGMP variables such as the Group Membership Interval Last Member Query Interval as well as the Other Querier Present Interval and the Startup Query Count RFC 2236 Range 1 255 Default 2 Version Configures the IGMP version used on an interface Options Version 1 or 2 Default Version 2 All routers on the subnet must support the same version However the multicast hosts on the subnet may support either IGMP versi
285. etbios type Hybrid y Domain Name example com Bootfile fwmebst Next Server hora 6 day hour min E Infinite Lease time CLI This example configures a network address pool Console config ip dhcp pool tps 4 104 Console config dhcp network 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 4 105 Console config dhcp default router 10 1 0 253 4 106 Console config dhcp dns server 10 2 3 4 4 108 Console config dhcp netbios name server 10 1 0 33 4 110 Console config dhcp tnetbios node type hybrid 4 111 Console config dhcp domain name example com 4 107 Console config dhcp bhootfile wme bat 4 109 Console config dhcp next server 10 1 0 21 4 109 Console config dhcp lease infinite 4 112 Console config dhcp 3 60 Dynamic Host CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL Configuring a Host Address Pool Web Click DHCP Server Pool Configuration Click the Configure button for any entry Click the radio button for Host Enter the IP address subnet mask and hardware address for the client device Configure the optional parameters such as gateway server and DNS server Then click Apply Pool Name mgr gt gt Network IP Subnet C Mask lt lt Option gt gt Default Router horoz DNS Server TES Netbios Server roo Netbios type Hybrid y Domain Name example com Boot le acabar Next Server horon Ot S Lease time Infinite Go back to Pool Configure Host IP 10 1 0 19
286. etver 3 55 4 102 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP downloading software 3 22 4 53 B 1 DSCP enabling 3 126 4 191 mapping priorities 3 129 4 191 DVMRP configuring 3 222 4 290 global settings 3 223 4 290 4 295 interface settings 3 227 4 296 4 297 neighbor routers 3 229 4 300 routing table 3 230 4 299 dynamic addresses displaying 3 85 4 143 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E edge port STA 3 97 3 101 4 156 event logging 4 37 Index 1 INDEX F firmwate displaying version 3 14 4 52 upgrading 3 22 4 53 B 1 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 154 4 218 GVRP global setting 3 107 4 175 interface configuration 3 115 4 177 H hardware version displaying 3 14 4 52 I IEEE 802 1D 3 87 4 148 IEEE 802 1w 3 87 4 148 TEEE 802 1x 3 32 4 66 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 3 32 4 66 IGMP description of protocol 3 135 groups displaying 3 142 4 213 Layer 2 3 136 4 196 Layer 3 3 144 4 205 query 3 136 4 201 4 206 query Layer 2 3 137 4 201 query Layer 3 3 144 4 205 services displaying 3 148 4 213 snooping 3 136 4 197 snooping configuring 3 137 4 196 ingress filtering 3 115 4 168 IP address Index 2 BOOTP DHCP 3 20 4 98 4 216 setting 2 6 3 17 4 216 IP port priority enabling 3 131 4 187 mapping priorities 3 131 4 188 IP precedence enabling 3 126 4 189 mapping priorities 3 127 4 189 IP routing 3 149 4 225 configuring i
287. evBadPackets RevBadRoutes SendUpdates 10 1 0 25 3 0 0 13 LOR L253 0 0 13 Console show ip rip peer Peer UpdateTime Version RevBadPackets RevBadRoutes 10 1 0 254 1625 2 0 0 10 1 1 254 1625 2 0 0 Console Field Description show ip rip configuration Interface IP address of the interface SendMode RIP version sent on this interface none RIPv1 RIPv2 or RIPv2 broadcast ReceiveMode RIP version received on this interface none RIPv1 RIPv2 RIPv1 or RIPv2 Poison Shows if split horizon poison reverse or no protocol message loopback prevention method is in use Authentication Shows if authentication is set to simple password or none show p rip status Interface IP address of the interface RevBadPackets Number of bad RIP packets received RevBadRoutes Number of bad routes received SendUpdates Number of route changes show ip rip peer Peer IP address of a neighboring RIP router UpdateTime Last time a route update was received from this peer 4 243 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Field Description Version Whether RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets were received from this peer RevBadPackets Number of bad RIP packets received from this peer RevBadRoutes Number of bad routes received from this peer Open Shortest Path First OSPF 4 244 Command Function Mode Page General Configuration router ospf Enables or disables
288. everely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage e Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default e The default threshold is 500 packets per second e Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic e The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch Command Attributes Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 packets per second Broadcast Control Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled Web Click Port Port Broadcast Control Set the threshold for all ports click Apply Broadcast Control Threshold packets sec 600 Broadcast Control Status Enabled y 3 69 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 119 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 4 126 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 12 4 131 Information of Eth 1 12 Broadcast threshold Enabled 600 packets second Lacp status Disabled VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable f
289. f Default Gateway page 4 297 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Example The default settings are shown in the following example Console show route dvmrp Admin Status enable Probe Interval 10 Nbr expire 89 Minimum Flash Update Interval S prune lifetime 7200 route report 60 Default Gateway 0 07 00 Metric of Default Gateway zI Console show ip dvmrp route Use this command to display all entries in the DVMRP routing table Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example DMVRP routes are shown in the following example Console show ip dvmrp route Source Mask Upstream_nbr Interface Metric UpTime Expire 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 253 vlanl 1 84438 0 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 253 vlan2 1 84987 0 10 1 8 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 254 vlanl 2 19729 97 Console Field Description Source IP subnetwork that contains a multicast source an upstream router or an outgoing interface connected to multicast hosts Mask Subnet mask that is used for the source address This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Upstream_nb1 The IP address of the network device immediately upstream for one or more multicast groups Interface The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor Metric The metric for this interface used to calculate distance vectors 4 299 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Field Description UpTi
290. face Uptime Expire Capabilities 10 1 0 254 vianl 79315 32 6 Console Displaying the Routing Table The router learns source routed information from neighboring DVMRP routers and also advertises learned routes to its neighbors The router merely records path information it has learned on its own or from other routers It does not consider group membership or prune messages Information stored in the routing table includes subnetworks from which IP multicast traffic originates upstream routers that have sent multicast traffic in the past or have been learned through routing messages exchanged with other routers interfaces connected to an upstream router or outgoing interfaces that are connected to multicast hosts The DVMRP routing table contains multicast route information learned via DVMRP route updates and is used to forward IP multicast traffic The routes listed in the table do not reflect actual multicast traffic flows For this information you should look at the IGMP Member Port Table page 3 143 or the IGMP Group Membership Table page 3 148 Command Attributes IP Address IP subnetwork that contains a multicast source an upstream router or an outgoing interface connected to multicast hosts e Netmask Subnet mask that is used for the source address This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Upstream Neighbor IP address of the network device immediately upstream
291. fault Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 211 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows the IGMP configuration for VLAN 1 as well as the device currently serving as the IGMP querier for this multicast service Console show ip igmp interface vlan 1 Vlan 1 is up IGMP is enable version is 2 Robustness variable is 2 Query interval is 125 sec Query Max Response Time is 10 sec Last Member Query Interval is 1 sec Querier is 10 1 0 253 Console clear ip igmp group Use this command to delete entries from the IGMP cache Syntax clear ip igmp group group address interface vlan van id group address IP address of the multicast group vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Deletes all entries in the cache if no options are selected Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Enter the address for a multicast group to delete all entries for the specified group Enter the interface option to delete all multicast groups for the specified interface Enter no options to clear all multicast groups from the cache 4 212 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS Example The following example clears all multicast group entries for VLAN 1 Console clear ip igmp group interface vlan 1 Console show ip igmp groups Use this command to display information on multicast groups active on this switch Syntax show ip igmp groups group address interfa
292. figures individual trunk settings for STA 3 99 Configuration VLAN 3 102 VLAN Base Displays information on the VLAN type 3 107 Information supported by this switch VLAN Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN 3 108 and whether or not the port is tagged or untagged VLAN Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 110 VLAN Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 111 VLAN Static Configures membership type for interfaces 3 113 Membership including tagged untagged or forbidden VLAN Port Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 114 Configuration VLAN Trunk Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN 3 114 Configuration attributes Private VLAN 3 118 Private VLAN Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 3 118 Private VLAN Link Configures the private VLAN 3 119 Configuration Priority 3 120 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 120 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 120 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Menu Description Page Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output 3 122 queues Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 124 IP Precedence Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority 3 126 DSCP Priority Status or disables both IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping the 3 127 precedence tag to a
293. file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System Configuration Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the name of the file to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and then click Transfer from Server Transfer Configuration File from Server TFTP Server IP Address fro 0 19 Source File Name config Destination File Name C none G startup Transfer from Server zi If you download to a new file name then select the new file from the drop down box for Startup Configuration File and press Apply Changes To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Configuration File File Name startup hd Apply Changes a BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config 4 53 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload If you download the startup conf
294. filter Ethernet IT formatted packets e A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 84 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS mac access group Use this command to bind a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group a c _name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one Example Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 4 88 show mac access group Use this command to show the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 87 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 25 MAC access list jerry Console Related Commands
295. for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols DHCP Server and DHCP Relay A DHCP server is provided to assign IP addresses to host devices Since DHCP uses a broadcast mechanism a DHCP server and its client must physically reside on the same subnet Since it is not practical to have a DHCP server on every subnet DHCP Relay is also supported to allow dynamic configuration of local clients from a DHCP server located in a different network Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control 1 3 INTRODUCTION 1 4 network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limi
296. for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vlan Use this command to configure forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add v an list remove v an list no switchport forbidden vlan add v an list List of VLAN identifiers to add e remove v an list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vlan list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface 4 171 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console
297. for preventing loops that would cause endless retransmission of data traffic When protocol packets are caught in a loop links will be congested and protocol packets may be lost However the network will slowly converge to the new state RIP utilizes the following IP ROUTING three methods that can provide faster convergence when the network topology changes and prevent most loops from occurring e Split Horizon Never propagate routes back to an interface port from which they have been acquired e Poison Reverse Propagate routes back to an interface port from which they have been acquired but set the distance vector metrics to infinity This provides faster convergence Triggered Updates Whenever a route gets changed broadcast an update message after waiting for a short random delay but without waiting for the periodic cycle Protocol Message Authentication RIPv1 is not a secure protocol Any device sending protocol messages from UDP port 520 will be considered a router by its neighbors Malicious or unwanted protocol messages can be easily propagated throughout the network if no authentication is required RIPv2 supports authentication via a simple password When a router is configured to exchange authentication messages it will insert the password into all transmitted protocol packets and check all received packets to ensure that they contain the authorized password If any incoming protocol messages do not contai
298. for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config 1f switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if INTEREACE COMMANDS clear counters Use this command to clear statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console 4 127 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show interfaces status Use this command to display the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status 71 1erface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 vlan v an 1d Range 1 4094 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces
299. forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4 157 4 156 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree portfast Use this command to set an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax spanning tree portfast no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fa
300. frame types e all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if Htswitchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 166 4 167 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport ingress filtering 4 168 Use this command to enable ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport ingress filtering no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frame
301. free IP address for the DHCP client from its defined scope for the DHCP client s subnet and sends a DHCP response back to the DHCP relay agent L e this switch This switch then broadcasts the DHCP response received from the server to the client 3 53 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 54 Command Usage You must specify the IP address for at least one DHCP server Otherwise the switch s DHCP relay agent will not forward client requests to a DHCP server Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN VLAN Name Name of the VLAN Server IP Address Addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the switch s DHCP relay agent in order of preference Web Click DHCP Relay Configuration Enter up to five IP addresses for any VLAN then click Restart DHCP Relay to start the relay service Relay Configuration VLAN VLAN Server IP Address 1D Name 10 1 0 99 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Defaultvlan 0 0 0 0 Restart DHCP Relay CLI This example specifies one DHCP relay server for VLAN 1 and enables the relay service Console config interface vlan 1 4 119 Console config if dhcp relay server 10 1 0 99 4 101 Console config if ip dhcp relay 4 99 Console config if Dynamic Host CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL Configuring the DHCP Server This switch includes a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server that can assign temporary IP addresses to any attached host requesting service It can a
302. fying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 140 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 142 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services oooooo o 3 143 Layer 3 IGMP Query used with Multicast Routing 3 144 Configuring IGMP Interface Parameters 3 145 Displaying Multicast Group Information 3 148 TP Routing e O da te Git om td A thd 3 149 IVECO 3 149 Initial Configuration tania a da ak AG eee a 3 150 TP Smith A ara 3 151 Routing Path Management 0000 000008 3 152 Routing Protocols 2 0 0 cece cece eee 3 152 Basic IP Interface Configuration 00 00 e ee eee 3 154 Configuring IP Routing Interfaces ooooommmo m r oom 3 155 Address Resolution Protocol 0 00 eee eee ee eee 3 157 Proxy ARPA 3 158 Basic ARP Configuration 0000 c eee eee eee 3 159 Configuring Static ARP Addresses oooooom 3 160 Displaying Dynamically Learned ARP Entries 3 161 Displaying Local ARP Entries oooooomoooooo 3 163 Displaying ARP Statistics 0060 6 0 00 eee ee eee 3 164 Displaying Statistics for IP Protocols oo o ooooo o 3 165 TP Statisticsy sd AE A da Eos 3 165 ICMP Statistt es aa A 3 168 UDP Statistics idad ins 3 170 TEP Statistics aia it a 3 171 Configuring Static Routes 2 0 0 06 cece eee eee 3 172 Displaying the Routing Table oooooooccooommo 3 173 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol
303. ges crossing all interfaces on this router Statistical Values Parameter Description Received Request Number of ARP Request packets received by the router Received Reply Number of ARP Reply packets received by the router Sent Request Number of ARP Request packets sent by the router Sent Reply Number of ARP Reply packets sent by the router Web Click IP ARP Statistics ARP Statistics Received Request Reply Sent Request 53 Reply 31 3 164 IP ROUTING CLI This example provides detailed statistics on common IP related protocols Console show ip traffic 4 229 IP statistics Revd 5 total 5 local destination 0 checksum errors 0 unknown protocol 0 not a gateway Frags 0 reassembled 0 timeouts 0 fragmented 0 couldn t fragment Sent 9 generated 0 no route ICMP statistics Revd 0 checksum errors 0 redirects 0 unreachable 0 echo echo reply 0 mask requests 0 mask replies 0 quench parameter 0 timestamp redirects 0 unreachable 0 echo 0 echo reply mask requests 0 mask replies 0 quench 0 timestamp 0 time exceeded 0 parameter problem UDP statistics Revd 0 total 0 checksum errors 0 no port Sent 0 total TCP statistics Revd 0 total 0 checksum errors Sent 0 total ARP statistics Revd 0 requests 1 replies Sent 1 requests 0 replies Sent ooo Displaying Statistics for IP Protocols IP Statistics The Internet Protocol IP
304. guration VLAN Command Usage A graft message is sent by a router to cancel a prune state When a router receives a graft message it must respond with an graft acknowledgement message If this acknowledgement message is lost the router that sent the graft message will resend it a number of times as defined by the ip pim max graft retries command 4 307 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config if ip pim graft retry interval 9 Console config if ip pim max graft retries Use this command to configure the maximum number of times to resend a Graft message if it has not been acknowledged Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip pim max graft retries retries no ip pim graft retry interval retries The maximum number of times to resend a Graft Range 0 65535 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Example Console config 1f ip pim max graft retries 5 Console config if show router pim 4 308 Use this command to display the global PIM configuration settings Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show router pim Admin Status Enabled Console MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS show ip pim interface Use this command to display information about interfaces configured for PIM Syntax show ip pim interface v an id vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Comma
305. he IP interface IP Address IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host Note that the address 0 0 0 0 indicates the default gateway for this router 3 173 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 174 Netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Next Hop The IP address of the next hop or gateway in this route Protocol The protocol which generated this route information Options local static RIP OSPF e Metric Cost for this interface Entry Count The number of table entries Web Click IP Routing Routing Table Routing Table Current Interface IP Address Netmask Next Hop Protocol Metric 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 254 static 1 1 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 253 local 1 1 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 254 RIP 2 Clear all dynamic routes Entry Count 3 CLI This example shows routes obtained from various methods Console show ip route Ip Address Netmask Next 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 1 0 0 259 255 255 0 10 10 1 1 0 2555259552590 10 Total entries 3 Console 1 0 254 1 0 253 1 0 254 4 228 Protocol Metric Interface static 1 1 local 1 al RIP 2 1 IP ROUTING Configuring the Routing Information Protocol The RIP protocol is the most widely used routing protocol The RIP protocol uses a distance vector based approach
306. he IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor Up time The time since this device last became a DVMRP neighbor to this router Expire The time remaining before this entry will be aged out Capabilities A hexadecimal value that indicates the neighbor s capabilities Each time a probe message is received from a neighbor the router compares the capabilities bits with the previous version for that neighbor to check for changes in neighbor capabilities Refer to DVMRP IETF Draft v3 10 section 3 2 1 for a detailed description of these bits These bits are described below Leaf bit 0 Neighbor has only one interface with neighbors Prune bit 1 Neighbor supports pruning Generation ID bit 2 Neighbor sends its Generation ID in probe messages Mtrace bit 3 Neighbor can handle multicast trace requests SNMP bit 4 Neighbor is SNMP capable Netmask bit 5 Neighbor will accept network masks appended to the prune graft and graft acknowledgement messages Reserved bit 6 and 7 Reserved for future use Web Click Routing Protocol DVMRP Neighbor Information DVMRP Neighbor Information Neighbor Address Interface Up time Expire Capabilities 10 1 0 254 VLANI 79215 31 6 Entry Count 1 3 229 CONFI 3 230 GURING THE SWITCH CLI This example displays the only neighboring DVMRP router Console show ip dvmrp neighbor 4 300 Address Inter
307. he RADIUS server network port GC 4 63 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 63 4 61 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Function Mode Page radius server Sets the number of retries GC 4 64 retransmit radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending GC 4 65 authentication requests show tadius setver Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 65 radius server host Use this command to specify the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server host host_ip_address no radius server host host_ip_address IP address of server Default Setting 10 1 0 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server host 192 168 1 25 Console config 4 62 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS radius server port Use this command to set the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key Use this command to set the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logo
308. he destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface e The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor Use this command to display mirror information Syntax show port monitor n erface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Switch unit 1 e port Port number Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX 4 134 RATE LiMIT COMMANDS Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to contr
309. he report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 30 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 4 203 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage e The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect e This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 198 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 203 ip igmp snooping router port expire time Use this command to configure the query timeout Use the no form of this command to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port 1 e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds 4 204 Command Mode MULTICAST
310. he specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list VLAN CONFIGURATION Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged Web Click VLAN VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaulfVian Enabled VLAN ID 1 4094 k lt lt Add _ VLAN Name R amp D Remove Status W Enable CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 162 Console config vlan tvlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 163 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 4 172 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Ethl 2 Ethl 3 Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Ethl 6 Ethl 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Eth1 25 Eth1 26 2 Static R amp D Active Console config vlan Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN
311. hello messages from a neighboring PIM router before declaring it dead Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip pim hello holdtime seconds no ip pim hello interval seconds The hold time for PIM hello messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 105 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage The ip pim hello holdtime should be 3 5 times the value of ip pim hello interval page 4 304 Example Console config if ip pim hello holdtime 210 Console config if ip pim trigger hello interval Use this command to configure the maximum time before transmitting a triggered PIM Hello message after the router is rebooted or PIM is enabled on an interface Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip pim triggerr hello interval seconds no ip pim triggerr hello interval seconds The maximum time before sending a triggered PIM Hello message Range 0 65535 4 305 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 5 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e When a router first starts or PIM is enabled on an interface the hello interval is set to random value between 0 and the trigger hello interval This prevents synchronization of Hello messages on multi access links if multiple routers are powered on simultaneously e Also ifa Hello message is received from a new neighbor the receiving router will send its own Hello message after a random
312. her rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl 4 78 Related Commands access list ip 4 76 permit deny Extended ACL ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Use this command to add a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source and destination IP addresses protocol types source and destination TCP UDP ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax permit deny any source bitmask host source any destination bitmask no permit deny any any destination bitmask host destination protocol protocol number source bitmask host source host destination protocol protocol 1um ber permit deny any source bitmask host source any destination bitmask host destination protocol tcp sport source pord dport destination porl control code control code code bitmask no permit deny any any destination bitmask source bitmask host source host destination protocol tcp sport source pord dport destination porl control code control code code bitmask permit deny any source bitmask host source any destination bitmask host destination protocol udp sport source port dport destination porl no permit deny
313. hin its area When using route summaries local changes do not have to be propagated to other area routers This allows OSPF to be easily scaled for larger networks and provides a more stable network topology Command Usage e Use the Area Range Configuration page to summarize the routes for an area The summary route for an area is defined by an IP address and network mask You therefore need to structure each area with a contiguous set of addresses so that all routes in the area fall within an easily specified range This router also supports Variable Length Subnet Masks VLSMs so you can summarize an address range on any bit boundaty in a network address To summarize the external LSAs imported into your autonomous system i e local routing domain use the Summary Address Configuration screen page 3 208 IP ROUTING Command Attributes Area ID Identifies an area for which the routes are summarized The area ID must be in the form of an IP address Range Network Base address for the routes to summarize e Range Netmask Network mask for the summary route e Advertising Indicates whether or not to advertise the summary route If the summaty is not sent the routes remain hidden from the rest of the network Default Advertise Note This router supports up 64 summary routes for area ranges Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Area Range Configuration Specify the area identifier the base address an
314. home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics Mode Actve Be Link Up B Link Down TigerSwitch 10 100 Managed 24 2 Standalone L3 Switch Manager System Name La O Private VLAN Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 202 20 29 83 Priority POE EE aE Trunk Location of Contact e MP Snooping tes I E tatistics System Up Time 0 days O hours 2 minutes and 10 63 seconds ate Limit Connect to textual user interface Routing Protocol DHCP Send mail lo technical support ETE Connect to SMC Web Page Apply Reven Help 3 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply or Apply Changes button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the Web page configuration buttons Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply or Apply Changes Refresh Immediately updates values for the current page Apply Sets specified values to the system Apply Changes Sets specified values to the system Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure tha
315. how long a prune state will remain in effect for a multicast tree Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax prune lifetime seconds seconds Prune state lifetime Range 1 65535 4 294 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Default Setting 7200 seconds Command Mode Router Configuration Command Usage This command sets the prune state lifetime After the prune state expires the router will resume flooding multicast traffic from the multicast source device Example Console config router prune lifetime 5000 Console config router default gateway Use this command to specify the default DVMRP gateway for IP multicast traffic Use the no form to remove the default gateway Syntax default gateway 7p address no default gateway p address IP address of the default DVMRP gateway Default Setting None Command Mode Router Configuration Command Usage The specified interface advertises itself as a default route to neighboring DVMRP routers It advertises the default route out through its other interfaces Neighboring routers on the other interfaces return Poison Reverse messages for the default route back 4 295 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE to the router When the router receives these messages it records all the downstream routers for the default route e When multicast traffic with an unknown source address i e not found in the route table is received on the default upstream route interface
316. iate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than four ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it 3 79 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the Web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop You can create up to six trunks on the switch with up to four ports per trunk e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports e When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed
317. ible rfc1583 4 248 Console config router default information originate always metric 10 metric type 2 4 248 Console config router timers spf 10 4 250 Console config router 3 191 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 192 Configuring OSPF Areas An autonomous system must be configured with a backbone atea designated by area identifier 0 0 0 0 By default all other areas are created as normal transit areas Routers in a normal area may import or export routing information about individual nodes To reduce the amount of routing traffic flooded onto the network you can configure an area to export a single summarized route that covers a broad range of network addresses within the area page 3 196 To further reduce the amount of routes passed between areas you can configure an area as a stub or a not so stubby area NSSA Normal Area A large OSPF domain should be broken up into several areas to area increase network stability and reduce the ABR amount of routing traffic required through the use of route summaries that backbone ageregate a range of addresses into a rea single route The backbone or any PR normal area can pass traffic between other areas and are therefore known as transit areas Each router in an area has identical routing tables These tables may include area links summarized links or external links that depict the topology of the autonomous system Stub A stub do
318. icast Console Related Commands sntp server 4 43 sntp poll 4 44 sntp broadcast client 4 45 show sntp 4 45 sntp server Use this command to set the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server 7p1 7p2 2p3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 43 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 42 sntp poll 4 44 show sntp 4 45 sntp poll 4 44 Use this command to set the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode SYSTEM MANAG
319. id for manual bindings only The no host command only clears the address from the DHCP server database It does not cancel the IP address currently in use by the host Example Console config dhcp host 10 1 0 21 255 255 255 0 Console config dhcp Related Commands client identifier 4 114 hardware address 4 115 client identifier Use this command to specify the client identifier of a DHCP client Use the no form to remove the client identifier Syntax client identifier text tex hex hex no client identifier e text A text string Range 1 15 characters e hex The hexadecimal value Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Command Usage e This command identifies a DHCP client to bind to an address specified in the host command If both a client identifier and hardware address are configured for a host address the client identifier takes precedence over the hardware address in the search procedure 4 114 DHCP COMMANDS e BOOTP clients cannot transmit a client identifier To bind an address to a BOOTP client you must associate a hardware address with the host entry Example Console config dhcp client identifier text steve Console config dhcp Related Commands host 4 113 hardware address Use this command to specify the hardware address of a DHCP client This command is valid for manual bindings only Use the no form to remove the hardware
320. iguration file under a new file name you can set this file as the startup file at a later time and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 59 Console config exit Console reload 4 28 Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries Without SNTP the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup This switch acts as an SNTP client in two modes Unicast The switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Broadcast The switch sets its clock from an time server in the same subnet that broadcasts time updates If there is more than one SNTP server the switch accepts the first broadcast it detects and ignores broadcasts from other servers 3 25 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 26 Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to specific time servers i e client mode update its clock based on broadcasts from time servers or use both methods When both methods are enabled the switch wi
321. iie oA GAS Beate 4 76 access SE Ap s s2 oir AG he Re hee Shee iene doe Boas AB 4 76 permit deny Standard ACL 0 0 0 4 78 permit deny Extended ACL 0 000 4 79 ipraccess Croup sats idk a ad daa 4 81 show ip access QrOUP 2 eee eee ee 4 82 show ip access list o oooooooooocccconororr cromo 4 83 MAC ACEST AN Ecol aR e A AE SAN A aE de SRE doo 4 84 ACCESS SENAC ti Sete ole de note oe ag ks toast 4 84 permit deny MAC ACL 0 eee eee eee 4 85 MACACCESS PTOUP ad gh R Ahly as 4 87 show mac access QfOUP eee eee ee 4 87 show mac access list 2 0 ccc ooo 4 88 ACE AnformattOn 2 chcscs Petia gies Mesa aie Aa ae Set A 4 89 show access list ka e a n A a ESEE 4 89 show access gfoOup oooccccccconncocr rrr rr eee 4 89 SNMP Commands arai hoe e S AS 4 90 snmp server COMMUN Y 6 o 4 90 SHMP SCLVEL CONTACT cis ld as See 4 91 snmp server location 1 6 ee eee eee 4 92 snmp setvert host ida id 4 93 snmp server enable traps 6 eee eee 4 94 SHOWS a 4 95 xiv CONTENTS DHCP Commands ic dw eld ida read 4 97 DHCP Ghreint dd auc ack ale cl ese eed h 4 97 ip dhcp client identifier 0 0 eee eee eee 4 97 ip dheprrestatt client un seta vais Leenks eke 4 98 DHCP Relay iii ai 4 99 ip dhepitestart relay a cda hace tie S paid ita 4 99 1p dhicp relay Servet ii lr al ia pia fk 4 101 DHCP Seryer ai ar o Rees Baden es Bans eagle dada aS 4 102 Service ChCP Miia aida detain fed 4 103
322. ill receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch 3 51 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 52 Command Usage e You can enable or disable authentication messages via the Web interface e You can enable or disable authentication messages or link up down messages via the CLI Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Trap Manager IP Address Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Trap Manager Community String Community string sent with the notification operation Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message whenever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process Web Click SNMP SNMP Configuration Fill in the IP address and community string box for each Trap Manager that will receive these messages mark Enable Authentication Traps if required and then click Add Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New lt lt Add Trap Manager IP address 10 1 19 23 Remove Trap Manager Community String batman none Enable Authentication Traps 4 xl CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman 4 93 Console config fsnmp server enable traps authentication 4 94 Dynamic Host CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL Dynamic Host C
323. ime Slogfile_1l 0 3 Slogfile_2 0 3 diag_0070 0 1 96500 00 06 37 diag_0074 1 1 run_03024 0 2 1121956 00 21 41 run_10020 al 2 1124416 00 00 10 X modem Download D lelete File S et Startup File R eturn to Factory Default C hange Baudrate oJuit Select gt Press lt c gt to change the baud rate of the switch s serial connection Press lt b gt to select the option for 115200 baud There are two baud rate settings available 9600 and 115200 Using the higher baud rate minimizes the time required to download firmware code files Set your PC s terminal emulation software to match the 115200 baud rate Press lt Enter gt to reset communications with the switch Select gt Change baudrate A 9600 B 115200 Baudrate set to 115200 Check that the switch has sufficient flash memory space for the new code file before starting the download You can store a maximum of only two runtime and two diagnostic code files in the switch s flash memory Use the D elete File command to remove a runtime or diagnostic file Press lt x gt to start downloading the new code file 12 13 14 15 If using Windows HyperTerminal click the Transfer button and then click Send File Select the XModem Protocol and then use the Browse button to select the required firmware code file from your PC system The Xmodem file send window displays the progress of the download procedure Note
324. ind to a DHCP client Use the no form to remove the IP address for the client Syntax host address mask no host address Specifies the IP address of a client mask Specifies the network mask of the client Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Usage Guidelines e Host addresses must fall within the range specified for an existing network pool e When a client request is received the switch first checks for a network address pool matching the gateway where the request originated 1 e if the request was forwarded by a relay server If there is no gateway in the client request 1 e the request was not forwarded by a relay server the switch searches for a network pool matching the interface through which the client request was received It then searches for a manually configured host address that falls within the matching network pool When searching for a manual binding the switch compares the client identifier for DHCP clients and then compares the hardware address for DHCP or BOOTP clients If no manual binding has been specified for a host entry with the client identifier or hardware address commands then the switch will assign an address from the matching network pool If the mask is unspecified DHCP examines its address pools If no mask is found in the pool database the Class A B or C natural mask 4 113 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE is used see page 3 178 This command is val
325. ing The switch supports IP routing only Non IP protocols such as IPX and Appletalk cannot be routed by this switch and will be confined within their local VLAN group unless bridged by an external router To coexist with a network built on multilayer switches the subnetworks for non IP protocols must follow the same logical boundary as that of the IP subnetworks A separate multi protocol router can then be used to link the subnetworks by connecting to one port from each available VLAN on the network 3 153 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Basic IP Interface Configuration 3 154 To allow routing between different IP subnets you must enable IP Routing as described in this section You also need to you define a VLAN for each IP subnet that will be connected directly to this switch Note that you must first create a VLAN as described under Creating VLANs on page 3 110 before configuring the corresponding subnet Remember that if you need to manage the switch in band then you must define the IP subnet address for at least one VLAN Command Attributes IP Routing Status Configures the switch to operate as a Layer 2 switch or as a multilayer routing switch Options Disable this field to restrict operation to Layer 2 switching enable it to allow multilayer operation at either Layer 2 or 3 as required This command affects both static and dynamic unicast routing If IP routing is enabled all IP packets are routed using either
326. ing framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a teasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address PORT CONFIGURATION Parameter Description CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including
327. ings by entering the show vlan command e Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 172 vlan Use this command to configure a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan v an id name v an name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vian id name state vlan id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type e state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets 4 163 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan v an id deletes the VLAN no vlan v an id name removes the VLAN name no vlan v an id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The V
328. interface ethernet 1 1 4 119 Console config if Hmap ip port 80 cos 0 4 188 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 4 193 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 1 80 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Copying IP Settings to Another Interface You can copy IP Precedence DSCP priority or IP port priority settings from one interface port or trunk to other interfaces on the switch Command Attributes Copy IP Precedence Priority Settings Selects IP Precedence priority settings to be copied to other interfaces Copy DSCP Priority Settings Selects DSCP priority settings to be copied to other interfaces Copy IP Port Priority Settings Selects IP port priority settings to be copied to other interfaces Source Interface Selects the port or trunk from which to copy priority settings Destination Interface Selects the port or trunk to which the priority settings will be copied You can hold down the Ctrl key to select more than one port or trunk Web Click Priority Copy Settings Mark the priority types to be copied select the source and destination interface then click Copy Settings Copy Settings Copy IP Precedence Priority Settings I Enabled Copy DSCP Priority Setti
329. ion 2 configures previously unset interfaces to use RIPv2 for both sending and receiving protocol messages The update timer is the fundamental timer used to control all basic RIP processes Setting the update timer to a short interval can cause the router to spend an excessive amount of time processing updates On the other hand setting it to an excessively long time will make the routing protocol less sensitive to changes in the network configuration The timers must be set to the same values for all routers in the network IP ROUTING Command Attributes Global Settings RIP Routing Process Enables RIP routing for all IP interfaces on the router Default Disabled e Global RIP Version Specifies a RIP version used globally by the router Default RIP Version 1 Timer Settings e Update Sets the rate at which updates are sent This value will also set the timeout timer to 6 times the update time and the garbage collection timer to 4 times the update time Range 15 60 seconds Default 30 seconds Timeout Sets the time after which there have been no update messages that a route is declared dead The route is marked inaccessible i e the metric set to infinite and advertised as unreachable However packets are still forwarded on this route Default 180 seconds Garbage Collection After the meout interval expires the router waits for an interval specified by the garbage collection timer bef
330. is enabled on an interface Range 1 65535 seconds Default 5 When a router first starts or PIM is enabled on an interface the hello interval is set to random value between 0 and the Trigger Hello Interval This prevents synchronization of Hello messages on multi access links if multiple routers are powered on simultaneously Also if a Hello message is received from a new neighbor the receiving router will send its own Hello message after a random delay between 0 and the Trigger Hello Interval Prune Holdtime Configures of the hold time for the prune state The multicast interface that first receives a multicast stream from a particular source forwards this traffic to all other PIM interfaces on the router If there are no requesting groups on that interface the leaf node sends a prune message upstream and enters a prune state for this multicast stream The prune state is maintained until the prune holdtime timer expires or a graft message is received for the forwarding entry Range 1 65535 seconds Default 210 Graft Retry Interval Configures the time to wait for a graft acknowledgement before resending a graft A graft message is sent by a router to cancel a prune state When a router receives a graft message it must respond with an graft acknowledgement message If this acknowledgement message is lost the router that sent the graft message will resend it a maximum number of times as defined by Max Graft Retries
331. is is done on a per hop basis back toward the source of the multicast delivery tree PIM DM uses three different techniques to dynamically reconfigure the multicast spanning tree broadcasting pruning and grafting To use PIM DM you must enable it globally for the router as described below and for each interface that will support multicast routing as described in the next section Also note that IGMP must be enabled to allow the router to determine the location of group members Web Click Routing Protocol PIM DM General Settings Enable or disable PIM DM globally for the router and click Apply PIM DM General Settings PIM DM Protocol Enabled MULTICAST ROUTING CLI This example enables PIM DM globally and displays the current status Console config router pim 4 302 Console show router pim 4 308 Admin Status Enabled Console Configuring PIM DM Interface Settings To fully enable PIM DM you need to enable multicast routing globally for the router page 3 219 enable PIM DM globally for the router page 3 232 and also enable PIM DM for each interface that will participate in multicast routing Command Usage e PIM DM functions similar to DVMRP by periodically flooding the network with traffic from any active multicast server page 3 222 It also uses IGMP to determine the presence of multicast group members The main difference is that it uses the router s unicast routing table to det
332. it Port Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 77 Configuration Input Rate Limit Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 77 Trunk Configuration Output Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 77 Port Configuration Output Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 77 Trunk Configuration dot1X IEEE 802 1x Port authentication 3 32 dot1X Information Displays global configuration settings 3 34 dot1X Configuration Configures protocol parameters 3 36 dot1X Port Sets the authentication mode for individual ports 3 38 Configuration dot1X Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3 39 SNTP 3 25 SNTP Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including 3 26 broadcast mode or a specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the clock 3 27 IP 3 149 General 3 154 Global Settings Enables or disables routing specifies the default 3 154 gateway Routing Interface Configures the IP interface for the specified 3 155 VLAN ARP 3 157 General Sets the protocol timeout and enables or 3 159 disables proxy ARP for the specified VLAN Static Addresses Statically maps a physical address to an IP 3 160 address NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Menu Description Page Dynamic Addresses Shows dynamically learned entries in the IP 3 161 routing table Other Addresses Shows internal addresses used by the s
333. ith the LSA LS Type Summary Links LSA describes routes to networks Link State ID Router ID of the router that originated the LSA Advertising Router Advertising router ID TP ROUTING COMMANDS Field Description LS Sequence Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate Number LSAs LS Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA Length The length of the LSA in bytes Network Mask Destination network s IP address mask Metrics Cost of the link show ip ospf interface Use this command to display summary information for OSPF interfaces Syntax show ip ospf interface vlan v an d vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Vlan 1 is up Console show ip ospf interface vlan 1 Interface Address 10 1 1 253 Mask 255 255 255 0 Area 10 1 0 0 Router ID 10 1 1 253 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec State BDR Priority 1 Designated Router id 10 1 1 252 Interface address 10 1 1 252 Backup Designated router id 10 1 1 253 Interface addr 10 1 1 253 Timer intervals configured Hello 10 Dead 40 Retransmit 5 Console Field Description Vian VLAN ID and Status of physical link Interface Address IP address of OSPF interface Mask Network mask for interface address Area OSPF area to which this interface belongs Router ID Router ID Network Type Includes broadcast non broadcast or poi
334. itialize Console Access Control List Commands 4 74 Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests incoming packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one If a list contains all permit rules a packet will be accepted as soon as it passes any of the rules If a list contains all deny rules then a packet will be rejected as soon as it fails any one of the rules In other words if no rules match for a permit list the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a deny list the packet is accepted ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and TCP UDP port number If the TCP protocol type is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code e MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060
335. k as the source network then the packet can be transmitted directly without the help of a router However if the MAC address is not yet known to the switch an Address Resolution Protocol ARP packet with the destination IP address is broadcast to get the destination MAC address from the destination node The IP packet can then be sent directly with the destination MAC addtess If the destination belongs to a different subnet on this switch the packet can be routed directly to the destination node However if the packet belongs to a subnet not included on this switch then the packet should be sent to a router with the MAC address of the router itself used as the destination MAC address and the destination IP address of the destination node The router will then forward the packet to the destination node via the correct path The router can also use the ARP protocol to find out the MAC address of the destination node of the next router as necessary Note In order to perform IP switching the switch should be recognized by other network nodes as an IP router either by setting it as the default gateway or by redirection from another router via the ICMP process When the switch receives an IP packet addressed to its own MAC address the packet follows the Layer 3 routing process The destination IP address is checked against the Layer 3 address table If the address is not already 3 151 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 152 there the switch
336. k interface router rip Use this command to enable Routing Information Protocol RIP routing for all IP interfaces on the router Use the no form to disable it Syntax router rip no router rip 4 231 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Default Setting Disabled Command Usage RIP is used to specify how routers exchange routing table information e This command is also used to enter router configuration mode Example Console config router rip Console config router Related Commands network 4 233 timers basic Use this command to configure the RIP update timer timeout timer and garbage collection timer Use the no form to restore the defaults Syntax timers basic pdate seconds no timers basic update seconds Sets the update timer to the specified value sets the timeout time value to 6 times the update time and sets the garbage collection timer to 4 times the update time Range for update timer 15 60 seconds Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting Update 30 seconds Timeout 180 seconds Garbage collection 120 seconds 4 232 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Usage The update timer sets the rate at which updates are sent This is the fundamental timer used to control all basic RIP processes e The meout timer is the time after which there have been no update messages that a route is declared dead The rou
337. k of SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty Statement SMC Networks Inc SMC warrants its products to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the applicable warranty term All SMC products carry a standard 90 day limited warranty from the date of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller SMC may at its own discretion repair or replace any product not operating as warranted with a similar or functionally equivalent product during the applicable warranty term SMC will endeavor to repair or replace any product returned under warranty within 30 days of receipt of the product The standard limited warranty can be upgraded to a Limited Lifetime warranty by registering new products within 30 days of purchase from SMC or its Authorized Reseller Registration can be accomplished via the enclosed product registration card or online via the SMC web site Failure to register will not affect the standard limited warranty The Limited Lifetime warranty covers a product during the Life of that Product which is defined as the period of time during which the product is an Active SMC product A product is considered to be Active while it is listed on the current SMC price list As new technologies emerge older technologies become obsolete and SMC will at its discretion replace an
338. l Traffic Class 3 Weight Value fea 1 255 CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights of 16 64 128 and 240 to the CoS priority queues 0 1 2 and 3 Console config queue bandwidth 16 64 128 240 4 183 Console config exit Console show queue bandwidth 4 185 Queue ID Weight Console Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue 3 125 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence ot DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority 3 126 The swit
339. l IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Root Hold Tim
340. lan id VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 162 Router router rip ospf dvmrp pim Console config router 4 231 4 246 4 291 4 302 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config 4 9 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Line Processing 4 10 Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all chatacters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl P Shows the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes the entire lin
341. lays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Displays the global port access control parameters that can be configured for this switch as described in the preceding pages including reauth enabled page 4 69 reauth period page 4 70 quiet period page 4 70 tx period page 4 71 and max req page 4 68 It also displays the following global parameters which are set to a fixed value including the following items supp timeout Supplicant timeout setver timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 68 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays detailed port access control settings for each interface as described in the preceding pages including administrative status for port access control Max request page 4 68 Quiet period page 4 70 Reauth period page 4 70 Tx period AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS page 4 71 and Port control page 4 68 It also displays the following information Status Authorization status authorized or unauthorized Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnecte
342. le This example enables message digest authentication for the specified interface Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf authentication message digest Console config if Related Commands ip ospf authentication key 4 264 ip ospf message digest key 4 265 4 263 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE ip ospf authentication key Use this command to assign a simple password to be used by neighboring routers Use the no form to remove the password Syntax ip ospf authentication key key no ip ospf authentication key key Sets a plain text password Range 1 8 characters Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting No password Command Usage e Before specifying plain text password authentication for an interface configure a password with the ip ospf authentication key command Before specifying MD5 authentication for an interface configure the message digest key id and key with the ip ospf message digest key command e A different password can be assigned to each network interface basis but the password must be used consistently on all neighboring routers throughout a network i e autonomous system Example This example sets a password for the specified interface Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf authentication key badboy Console config if Related Commands ip ospf authentication 4 263 4 264 IP ROUTING COMMANDS
343. le Field Description Destination Identifier for the destination router Next Hop IP address of the next hop toward the destination Cost Link metric for this route Type Router type of the destination either ABR ASBR or both RteType Route type either intra area or inter area route INTRA or INTER Area The area from which this route was learned SPF No The number of times the shortest path first algorithm has been executed for this route IP ROUTING COMMANDS show ip ospf database Use this command to show information about different OSPF Link State Advertisements LSAs stored in this router s database Syntax show ip ospf area id database adv router p address show ip ospf area id database asbr summaty ink state id show ip ospf area id database asbr summary ink sfate id adv router 2p address show ip ospf area id database asbr summary ink state id self originate ink state id show ip ospf area id database database summary show ip ospf area id database external k state id show ip ospf area id database external k state id adv router p address show ip ospf area id database external nk state id self originate p address show ip ospf area id database network 7k state id show ip ospf area id database network k state id adv router p address show ip ospf area id database network nk state id self originate ink state id show ip ospf area id data
344. le config interface vlan 1 Console config if tip address dhcp Console config if Htend Console ip dhcp restart client Console show ip interface Vlan 1 is up addressing mode is DHCP Interface address is 10 1 0 54 mask is 255 255 255 0 Primary MTU is 1500 bytes Proxy ARP is disabled Split horizon is enabled Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred Community Strings Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users or user groups and set the access level 2 9 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 10 The default strings ar
345. le com Console config dhcp 4 107 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE dns server Use this command to specify the Domain Name System DNS IP servers available to a DHCP client Use the no form to remove the DNS server list Syntax dns server address address2 no dns server e address Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server address2 Specifies the IP address of the alternate DNS server Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Usage Guidelines If DNS IP servers are not configured for a DHCP client the client cannot correlate host names to IP addresses e Servers are listed in order of preference starting with address as the most preferred server Example Console config dhcp dns server 10 1 1 253 192 168 3 19 Console config dhcp 4 108 DHCP COMMANDS next server Use this command to configure the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client Use the no form to remove the boot server list Syntax next server address no next server address address Specifies the IP address of the next server in the boot process which is typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Example Console config dhcp next server 10 1 0 21 Console config dhcp Related Commands bootfile 4 109 bootfile Use this command to specify the name of the default boot imag
346. le or image used to start up the GC 4 59 system copy Use this command to move upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection 4 53 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 54 Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 6699 66 99 Ce 99 e
347. ll update its clock using information broadcast from time servers but will query the specified server s if a broadcast is not received within the polling interval Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client This mode requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field SNTP Broadcast client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP broadcast client This mode requires no other configuration settings the switch will obtain time updates from time server broadcasts using the multicast address 224 0 1 1 SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server when set to SNTP Client mode Range 16 16284 seconds Default 16 seconds SNTP Server In unicast mode sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server If this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration Current Time Jan 8 15 30 37 2001 SNTP Client Enable SNTP Broadcast client Enable SNTP Poll Interval 16 16384 16 SNTP Server r0 1 0 19 ra7 ez140 80 128 250 36 2 BASIC CONFIGURATION CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP broadcast client Console
348. lso provide other network settings such as the domain name default gateway Domain Name Servers DNS Windows Internet Naming Service WINS name servers or information on the bootup file for the host device to download Addresses can be assigned to clients from a common address pool configured for a specific IP interface on this switch or fixed addresses can be assigned to hosts based on the client identifier code or MAC addtess Address Pool WE j E ajaja a al aja La Command Usage Static Addresses 8 network address pools 32 static addresses all within the confines of configured network address pools First configure any excluded addresses including the address for this switch Then configure address pools for the network interfaces You can configure up to 8 network address pools You can also manually bind an address to a specific client if required However any fixed addresses must fall within the range of an existing network address pool You can configure up to 32 fixed host addresses 1 e entering one address per pool 3 55 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Enabling the Server Setting Excluded Addresses Enable the DHCP Server and specify the IP addresses that it should not be assigned to clients Command Attributes DHCP Server Enables or disables the DHCP server on this switch Default Disabled Excluded Addresse
349. lticast traffic Default none The specified interface advertises itself as a default route to neighboring DVMRP routers It advertises the default route out through its other interfaces Neighboring routers on the other interfaces return Poison Reverse messages for the default route back 3 225 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 226 to the router When the router receives these messages it records all the downstream routers for the default route When multicast traffic with an unknown source address i e not found in the route table is received on the default upstream route interface the router forwards this traffic out through the other interfaces with known downstream routers However when multicast traffic with an unknown source address is received on another interface the router drops it because only the default upstream interface can forward multicast traffic from an unknown soutce CLI only Web Click Routing Protocol DVMRP General Settings Enable or disable DVMRP Set the global parameters that control neighbor timeout the exchange of routing information or the prune lifetime and click Apply DVMRP General Settings DVMRP Protocol Enabled Probe Interval seconds fo Neighbor Timeout Interval seconds BO Report Interval seconds bo Flash Update Interval seconds 5 Prune Lifetime seconds 7200 MULTICAST ROUTING CLI This sets the global parameters for DVMRP and displays the curr
350. ly Changes y CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server select config or opcode file type then enter the source and destination file names set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch Console copy tftp file 4 53 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name M100000 bix Destination file name V1 0 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config bhoot system opcode V1 0 4 59 Console config exit Console reload 4 28 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes ot the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 3 23 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 24 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 gt ce 99 ce 9 Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new
351. m dense mode 0 0 c ccc ee eee 4 303 ip pim hello interval 0 eee 4 304 ip pim hello holdtime 0 00 eee eee eee 4 305 XX CONTENTS ip pim trigger hello interval oooooooooooooo 4 305 ip pim join prune holdtime 0 0000 ee eee 4 306 ip pim graft retry interval oooooocoooommoo 4 307 ip pim max graft retries 2 0 0 eee eee 4 308 show router pins dida 4 308 show ip pim interface s sarii snan eee eee 4 309 show ip pim neighbor 66 cc eee eee 4 309 Troubleshooting i254 00s 0n o8 Gee Mod Rose dos A 1 Upgrading Firmware via the Serial Port B 1 Glossary Index xxi CONTENTS xxii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching and Layer 3 routing It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup to TFTP server Backup and Restore Authentication Console Telnet Web User name password RADIUS SNMP Community strings Port IEEE 802 1x Access Control Lists Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs DHCP Relay and Server Supported Po
352. mac access group 4 87 show mac access list Use this command to display the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 85 mac access group 4 87 4 88 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS ACL Information Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 89 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 89 show access list Use this command to show all ACLs and associated rules Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 0 0 0 255 any permit 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 any dport 80 permit 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 Console show access group Use this command to show the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console 4 89 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE SNMP Commands
353. mand to configure the frequency at which host query messages are sent Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp query interval seconds no ip igmp query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 1 255 4 207 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e Multicast routers send host query messages to determine the interfaces that are connected to downstream hosts requesting a specific multicast service Only the designated multicast router for a subnet sends host query messages which are addressed to the multicast address 224 0 0 1 For IGMP Version 1 the designated router is elected according to the multicast routing protocol that runs on the LAN But for IGMP Version 2 the designated querier is the lowest IP addressed multicast router on the subnet Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config if ip igmp query interval 100 Console config if ip igmp max resp interval Use this command to configure the maximum response time advertised in IGMP queries Use the no form of this command to restore the default Syntax ip igmp max resp interval seconds no ip igmp max resp interval seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 1 255 Default Setting 10 seconds 4 208 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS
354. mation in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit VLANs groups which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled BASIC CONFIGURATION Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No Traffic Classes Enable GMRP F Enable GVRP F Enable sl CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 176 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an initial IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings 1P address 0 0 0 0 and netmask 255 0 0 0 to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment if routing is not enabled on this switch 3 17 CONFIGURING THE SW
355. me The time elapsed since this entry was created Expire The time remaining before this entry will be aged out show ip dvmrp neighbor Use this command to display all of the DVMRP neighbor routers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dvmrp neighbor Address Interface Uptime Expire Capabilities 10 1 0 254 vlanl 79315 32 6 Console Field Description Address The IP address of the network device immediately upstream for this multicast delivery tree Interface The IP interface on this router that connects to the upstream neighbor Uptime The time since this device last became a DVMRP neighbor Expire The time remaining before this entry will be aged out Capabilities The neighboring router s capabilities may include Leaf bit 0 Neighbor has only one interface with neighbors Prune bit 1 Neighbor supports pruning Generation ID bit 2 Neighbor sends its Generation ID in probe messages Mtrace bit 3 Neighbor can handle multicast trace requests SNMP bit 4 Neighbor is SNMP capable Netmask bit 5 Neighbor will accept network masks appended to the prune graft and graft acknowledgement messages Reserved bit 6 and 7 Reserved for future use 4 300 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS show ip dvmrp interface PIM Use this command to display the DVMRP configuration for interfaces which have enabled DVMRP Command Mode
356. ment stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The first snmp server community command you enter enables SNMP SNMPv1 The no snmp server community command disables SNMP Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp setver contact Use this command to set the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config 4 91 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands snmp server location 4 92 snmp server location Use this command to set the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location ext no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 4 91 4 92 SNMP CoMMANDS snmp server host
357. mes Area 0 0 0 1 Number of interfaces in this area is SPF algorithm executed 5 times Area 0 0 0 2 STUB Number of interfaces in this area is SPF algorithm executed 13 times Area 0 0 0 3 NSSA Number of interfaces in this area is SPF algorithm executed 12 times Console Configuring Summary Addresses for External AS Routes An Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR can redistribute routes learned from other protocols into all attached autonomous systems See Redistributing External Routes on page 3 210 To reduce the amount of external LSAs imported into your local routing domain you can configure the router to advertise an aggregate route that consolidates a broad range of external addresses Command Usage If you are not sure what address ranges to consolidate first enable external route redistribution via the Redistribute Configuration screen view the routes imported into the routing table and then configure one or more summary addresses to reduce the size of the routing table and consolidate these external routes for advertising into the local domain e To summarize routes sent between OSPF areas use the Area Range Configuration screen page 3 196 IP ROUTING Command Attributes IP Address Summary address covering a range of addresses Netmask Network mask for the summary route Note This router supports up 16 Type 5 summary routes Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF
358. might result Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 3 93 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 94 Advanced Configuration Settings for RSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 This is the default Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State Enabled y Spanning Tree Type STP RSTP Prionty 0 61440 32768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 2 seconds Maximum Age 6 40 20 seconds Forward Delay 4 30 15 seconds Advanced Path Cost Method Short Long Transmission Limit 1 10 3 SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol and then sets the indicated attributes Console config spanning tree 4 147 Console config spanning tree mode rst 4 148
359. mmand Usage IGMP query can be enabled globally at Layer 2 via the ip igmp snooping command or enabled for specific VLAN interfaces at Layer 3 via the ip igmp command Layer 2 query is disabled if Layer 3 query is enabled Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if tip igmp Console config if end Console show ip igmp interface Vlan 1 is up IGMP is enable version is 2 Robustness variable is 2 Query interval is 125 sec Query Max Response Time is 10 sec Last Member Query Interval is 1 sec Querier is 10 1 0 253 Console Related Commands ip igmp snooping 4 197 show ip igmp snooping 4 199 4 206 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp robustval Use this command to specify the robustness 1 e expected packet loss for this interface Use the no form of this command to restore the default value Syntax ip igmp robustval robust value no ip igmp robustval robust value The robustness of this interface Range 1 255 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage The robustness value is used in calculating the appropriate range for other IGMP variables such as the Group Membership Interval ip igmp last memb query interval page 4 209 as well as the Other Querier Present Interval and the Startup Query Count RFC 2236 Example Console config if ip igmp robustval 3 Console config if ip igmp query interval Use this com
360. mpatible ReceiveMode RIP version received on this interface none RIPv1 RIPv2 RIPv1Orv2 InstabilityPreventing Shows if split horizon poison reverse or no instability prevention method is in use AuthType Shows if authentication is set to simple password or none RevBadPackets Number of bad RIP packets received RevBadRoutes Number of bad toutes received SendUpdates Number of route changes Peer Information PeerAddress IP address of a neighboring RIP router UpdateTime Last time a route update was received from this peer Version Whether RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets were received from this peer RevBadPackets Number of bad RIP packets received from this peer RevBadRoutes Number of bad routes received from this peer 3 184 IP ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol RIP Statistics RIP Statistics Globals RIP Routing Process Enabled Update Time in Seconds 30 Number of Route Changes 4 Number of Queries D Interface Information Interface SendMode ReceiveMode InstabilityPreventing AuthType RevBadPackets RevBadRoutes SendUpdates 10 1 0 253 rip1 Compatible RIPV1 Orv2 SplitHorizon noAuthentication 0 0 60 10 1 1 253 rip1 Compatible RIPV1 Orve SplitHorizon noAuthentication 0 0 60 Peer Information PeerAddress UpdateTime Version RevBadPackets RevBadRoutes 10 1 0 254 4093 2 0 14lu 10 1 1 254 4093 2 0 14lu
361. n a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire ot radio Open Shortest Path First OSPF OSPF is a link state routing protocol that functions better over a larger network such as the Internet as opposed to distance vector routing protocols such as RIP It includes features such as unlimited hop count authentication of routing updates and Variable Length Subnet Masks VLSM Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1x Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Glossaty 5 GLOSSARY Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwatded to and from uplink ports Protocol Independent Multicasting PIM This multicast routing protocol floods multicast traffic downstream and calculates the shortest path back to the multicast source network via reverse path forwarding PIM uses the router s IP routing tabl
362. n access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None 4 63 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit 4 64 Use this command to set the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no tadius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS radius server timeout Use this command to set the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number _of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server Use this command to display the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server
363. n back to 9600 baud 18 Set your PC s terminal emulation software baud rate back to 9600 baud Press lt Enter gt to reset communications with the switch 19 Press lt q gt to quit the firmware download mode and boot the switch B 4 GLOSSARY Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC e Layer 2 information Address Resolution Protocol ARP ARP converts between IP addresses and MAC i e hardware addresses ARP is used to locate the MAC address corresponding to a given IP address This allows the switch to use IP addresses for routing decisions and the corresponding MAC addresses to forward packets from one hop to the next Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated S
364. n interface 3 82 TRUNK CONFIGURATION Web Click Trunk Trunk Configuration Enter a trunk ID of 1 6 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Configuration Member List Current New Trunk1 Unit Port11 Trunk1 Unitl Port12 lt lt Add Trunk 1 6 Remove Port 13 CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 11 and 12 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config tinterface port channel 2 Console config 1f exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100tx Mac address 22 22 22 22 22 2c Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control status Disabled Current status Created by User Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Console 4 119 4 119 4 138 4 128 3 83 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses f
365. n mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit Use this command to exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 4 30 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS System Management Commands These commands ate used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Command Function Page Group Device Configures information that uniquely identifies this 4 31 Designation switch User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for 4 32 management access Web Server Enables management access via a Web browser 4 35 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 37 Time Sets the system clock using SNTP and time zone 4 41 System Clock commands System Status Displays system configuration active managers and 4 47 version information Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 32 snmp setver Sets the system contact string GC 4 91 cont
366. n the ARP cache change specific dynamic entries into static entries or clear all dynamic entries from the cache Command Attributes IP Address IP address of a dynamic entry in the cache e MAC Address MAC address mapped to the corresponding IP address e Interface VLAN interface associated with the address entry 3 161 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH e Dynamic to Static Changes a selected dynamic entry to a static entry Clear All Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache Entry Count The number of dynamic entries in the ARP cache These buttons take effect immediately You are not prompted to confirm the action Web Click IP ARP Dynamic Addresses You can use the buttons provided to change a dynamic entry to a static entry or to clear all dynamic entries in the cache Dynamic Addresses Current IP address MAC address Interface 10 110 19 00 10 B5 62 03 74 1 Dynamic to Static Clear All Entry Count 1 y CLI This example shows all entries in the ARP cache Console show arp 4 224 Arp cache timeout 1200 seconds IP Address MAC Address Type Interface 10 1 0 0 EE tf ff ff tf ff other 1 10 1 0 11 00 11 22 33 44 55 static 1 10 1 0 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 static 1 10 1 0 19 00 10 b5 62 03 74 dynamic 1 10 1 0 253 00 00 ab cd 00 00 other 1 10 1 0 255 i fi ff ff ft ff other 1 Total entry 6 Console clear arp cache 4 223 This operation will delete all the dy
367. n the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 gt 6699 9 ES Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System Firmware Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the file name of the softwate to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Transfer from Server To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Transfer Operation Code Image File from Server Current Operation Code Version 1 2 0 4 TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 1 19 Source File Name V12 bix Destination File Name C V1204 17 le vi 2 Transfer from Server BASIC CONFIGURATION If you download to a new destination file then select the file from the drop down box for the operation code used at startup and click Apply Changes To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Operation Code Image File File Name 1 0 gt App
368. n the correct password they are simply dropped Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Receive Version The RIP version to receive on an interface RIPv1 Accepts only RIPv1 packets RIPv2 Accepts only RIPv2 packets RIPvi or RIPv2 Accepts RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets Default Do Not Receive Does not accept incoming RIP packets The default depends on the setting specified under RIP General Settings Global RIP Version RIPv1 RIPv1 or RIPv2 packets RIPv2 RIPv2 packets e Send Version The RIP version to send on an interface RIPv1 Sends only RIPv1 packets 3 181 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 182 RIPv2 Sends only RIPv2 packets RIPv1 Compatible Route information is broadcast to other routers with RIPv2 Default Do Not Send Does not transmit RIP updates The default depends on the setting specified under RIP General Settings Global RIP Version RIPv1 RIPv1 Compatible RIPv2 RIPv2 packets e Instability Preventing Specifies the method used to reduce the convergence time when the network topology changes and to prevent RIP protocol messages from looping back to the source router Default Split Horizon None No method is used If a loop occurs the hop count for a route may be gradually incremented to infinity i e 16 before the route is deemed unreachable Split Horizon This method never propagates routes back to an interface from which they have been
369. n the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN Glossaty 7 GLOSSARY XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 8 A acceptable frame type 3 115 4 167 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 3 42 4 75 4 76 4 79 MAC 3 42 4 75 4 84 4 84 4 88 Standard IP 3 42 4 75 4 76 4 78 Address Resolution Protocol See ARP address table 3 84 4 141 aging time 3 87 4 145 ARP configuration 3 159 4 221 description 3 157 proxy 3 158 4 224 statistics 3 164 4 229 B BOOTP 3 20 4 216 BPDU 3 88 broadcast storm threshold 3 69 4 126 C Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 5 command line interface See CLI community string 2 9 3 50 4 90 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 11 3 23 4 53 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 3 120 4 181 copying settings 3 133 DSCP 3 129 4 191 IP port priority 3 131 4 187 IP precedence 3 127 4 189 layer 3 4 priorities 3 125 4 187 INDEX queue mapping 3 122 4 184 traffic class weights 3 124 4 183 D default gateway configuration 3 154 4 218 default priority ingress port 3 120 4 182 default settings system 1 8 DHCP 3 20 4 216 address pool 3 57 4 104 client 3 18 4 97 dynamic configuration 2 8 telay service 3 53 4 99 s
370. nal AS Number of autonomous system external LSAs External Nssa Number of NSSA external network LSAs Total LSA Counts Total number of LSAs The following shows output when using the external keyword Console show ip ospf database external OSPF Router with id 192 168 5 1 Autonomous system 5 Displaying AS External Link States LS age 433 Options No TOS capability LS Type AS External Link Link State ID 10 1 1 253 External Network Number Advertising Router 10 1 2 254 LS Sequence Number 80000002 LS Checksum 0x51E2 Length 32 Network Mask 255 255 0 0 Metric Type 2 Larger than any link state path Metric 1 Forward Address 0 0 0 0 External Route Tag 0 Console 4 276 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Field Description OSPF Router id Router ID LS age Age of LSA in seconds Options Optional capabilities associated with the LSA LS Type AS External Links LSA describes routes to destinations outside the AS including default external routes for the AS Link State ID IP network number External Network Number Advertising Router Advertising router ID LS Sequence Sequence number of LSA used to detect older duplicate Number LSAs LS Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the LSA Length The length of the LSA in bytes Network Mask Addtess mask for the network Metric Type Type 1 or Type 2 external metric see redistribute on page 2
371. namic entries in ARP Cache Are you sure to continue this operation y n y Console 3 162 IP ROUTING Displaying Local ARP Entries The ARP cache also contains entries for local interfaces including subnet host and broadcast addresses Command Attributes IP Address IP address of a local entry in the cache e MAC Address MAC address mapped to the corresponding IP address e Interface VLAN interface associated with the address entry Entry Count The number of local entries in the ARP cache Web Click IP ARP Other Addresses Other Addresses Current IP Address MAC Address Interface 10 1 0 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF 1 10 1 0 253 00 00 4AB CD 00 00 1 10 1 0 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF 1 10 1 1 0 FF FF FF FF FF FF 2 10 1 1 253 00 00 AB CD 00 00 2 10 1 1 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF 2 Entry Count 6 gt CLI This router uses the Type specification other to indicate local cache entries in the ARP cache Console show arp 4 224 Arp cache timeout 1200 seconds IP Address MAC Address Type Interface 10 1 0 0 ff ff ff f f f f other 1 10 1 0 11 00 11 22 33 44 55 static 1 10 1 0 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 static 1 10 1 0 19 00 10 b5 62 03 74 dynamic 1 10 1 0 253 00 00 ab cd 00 00 other 1 10 1 0 255 E i f tf tt tt t other 1 Total entry 6 Console 3 163 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Displaying ARP Statistics You can display statistics for ARP messa
372. nd Usage This command displays the PIM settings for the specified interface as described in the preceding pages It also shows the address of the designated PIM router and the number of neighboring PIM routers Example Console show ip pim interface 1 Vlan 1 is up PIM is enabled mode is Dense Internet address is 10 1 0 253 Hello time interval is 30 sec trigger hello time interval is 5 sec Hello holdtime is 105 sec Join Prune holdtime is 210 sec Graft retry interval is 3 sec max graft retries is 2 DR Internet address is 10 1 0 254 neighbor count is 1 Console show ip pim neighbor Use this command to display information about PIM neighbors Syntax show ip pim neighbor p address p address IP address of a PIM neighbor Default Setting Displays information for all known PIM neighbors 4 309 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show ip pim neighbor Address VLAN Interface Uptime Expire Mode 49 1 0 254 1 17 38 16 00 01 25 Dense Console Field Description Address IP address of the next hop router VLAN Interface number that is attached to this neighbor Interface Uptime The duration this entry has been active Expire The time before this entry will be removed Mode PIM mode used on this interface Only Dense Mode is supported 4 310 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING Symptom Troubleshooting
373. nd mode to RIPv1 compatible i e called v2 broadcast in the CLI sets the method of preventing instability in the network topology to Split Horizon enables authentication via a simple password i e called text mode in the CLI Console config interface vlan 1 4 119 Console config if ip rip receive version 1 2 4 236 Console config if ip rip send version v2 broadcast 4 237 Console config 1f tip split horizon 4 239 Console config 1f tip rip authentication mode text 4 241 Console config if tip rip authentication key mighty 4 240 Console Displaying RIP Information and Statistics You can display basic information about the current global configuration settings for RIP statistics about route changes and queries information about the interfaces on this router that are using RIP and information about known RIP peer devices 3 183 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH RIP Information and Statistics Parameter Description Globals RIP Routing Process Indicates if RIP has been enabled or disabled Update Time in Seconds The interval at which RIP advertises known route information Default 30 seconds Number of Route Number of times routing information has changed Changes Number of Queries Number of router database queries received by this router Interface Information Interface IP address of the interface SendMode RIP version sent on this interface none RIPv1 RIPv2 rip1 Co
374. nd prune to build a source routed multicast delivery tree for each multicast source group pair It is simpler than DVMRP because it does not maintain it s own routing table Instead it uses the routing table provided by the unicast routing protocol enabled on the router interface When the router receives a multicast packet for a source group pair PIM DM checks the unicast routing table on the inbound interface to determine if this is the same interface used for routing unicast packets to the multicast source 3 231 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 232 network If it is not the router drops the packet and sends a prune message back out the source interface If it is the same interface used by the unicast protocol then the router forwards a copy of the packet to all the other interfaces for which is has not already received a prune message for this specific source group pair DVMRP holds the prune state for about two hours while PIM DM holds it for only about three minutes This results in more flooding than encountered with DVMRP but this the only major trade off for the lower processing overhead and simplicity of configuration for PIM DM Configuring Global PIM DM Settings PIM DM is used to route multicast traffic to nodes which have requested a specific multicast service via IGMP It uses the router s unicast routing table to determine if the interface through which a packet is received provides the shortest path back to the source Th
375. ndependent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM globally for the router and to enter router configuration mode Use the no form to disable PIM DM multicast routing Syntax router pim no router pim Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command enables PIM DM globally for the router You also need to enable PIM DM for each interface that will support multicast routing using the ip pim dense mode command page 4 303 and make any changes necessary to the multicast protocol parameters Example Console config router pim Console show router pim Admin Status Enabled Console MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS ip pim dense mode Use this command to enable PIM DM on the specified interface Use the no form to disable PIM DM on this interface Syntax ip pim dense mode no pim dense mode Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage To fully enable PIM DM you need to enable multicast routing globally for the router with the ip multicast routing command page 4 288 enable PIM DM globally for the router with the router pim command page 4 302 and also enable PIM DM for each interface that will participate in multicast routing with the ip pim dense mode command If you enable PIM on an interface you should also enable IGMP on that interface e Dense mode interfaces are subject to multicast flooding by default and are only remove
376. ne group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 105 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page VLAN CONFIGURATION Web Click VLAN VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 7 Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member 1 e C C C 2 c e c 3 c C c e 4 c C e 5 c C C G si CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 119 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4 170 Console config 1f exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Adding Static Members to VLANSs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by
377. nfig map ip port Interface Configuration Use this command to set IP port priority ic TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number e port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 e cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority e This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if 4 188 PRIORITY COMMANDS map ip precedence Global Configuration Use this command to enable IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax map ip precedence no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable
378. ng contact for non broadcast networks Init Have received Hello packet but communications not yet established Two way Bidirectional communications established ExStart Initializing adjacency between neighbors Exchange Database descriptions being exchanged Loading LSA databases being exchanged Full Neighboring routers now fully adjacent Identification flags include D Dynamic neighbor S Static neighbor DR Designated router BDR Backup designated router Address IP address of this interface show ip ospf summary address Use this command to display all summary address information Syntax show ip ospf summary address Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows a summaty address and associated network mask Console show ip ospf summary address 10 1 400 255 255 0 0 Console 4 283 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show 4 284 Related Commands summary address 4 253 ip ospf virtual links Use this command to display detailed information about virtual links Syntax show ip ospf virtual links Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ospf virtual links Virtual Link to router 10 1 1 253 is up Transit area 10 1 1 0 Transmit Delay is 1 sec Timer intervals configured Hello 10 Dead 40 Retransmit 5 Console Field Description Virtual Link to routey OSPF neighbor and link state up or down Transit ar
379. ng routers through a process called reliable flooding You can show information about different LSAs stored in this router s database which may include any of the following types Router Type 1 All routers in an OSPF area originate Router LSAs that describe the state and cost of its active interfaces and neighbors Network Type 2 The designated router for each area originates a Network LSA that describes all the routers that are attached to this network segment Summary Type 3 Area border routers can generate Summary LSAs that give the cost to a subnetwork located outside the area AS Summary Type 4 Area border routers can generate AS Summary LSAs that give the cost to an autonomous system boundary router ASBR AS External Type 5 An ASBR can generate an AS External LSA for each known network destination outside the AS NSSA External Type 7 An ASBR within an NSSA generates an NSSA external link state advertisement for each known network destination outside the AS Command Attributes Area ID Area defined for which you want to view LSA information This item must be entered in the form of an IP address Link ID The network portion described by an LSA The Link ID should be An IP network number for Type 3 Summary and Type 5 AS External LSAs When an Type 5 AS External LSA is describing a default route its Link ID is set to the default destination 0 0 0 0 A Router ID for Router
380. ng table space is saved in a stub by blocking Type 4 AS summary LSAs and Type 5 external LSAs The default setting for this command completely isolates the stub by blocking Type 3 summary LSAs that advertise the default route for destinations external to the local area or the autonomous system e Use the area default cost command to specify the cost of a default summary route sent into a stub by an ABR e This router supports up to 16 total areas either normal transit areas stubs or NSSAs Example This example creates a stub area 10 2 0 0 and assigns all interfaces with class B addresses 10 2 x x to the stub Console config router tarea 10 2 0 0 stub Console config router network 10 2 0 0 0 255 255 255 area 10 2 0 0 Console config router 4 257 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands area default cost 4 252 area nssa Use this command to define a not so stubby area NSSA To remove an NSSA use the no form without any optional keywords To remove an optional attribute use the no form without the relevant keyword Syntax area area id nssa no redistribution default information originate no area area id nssa no redistribution default information originate area id Identifies the NSSA The area ID must be in the form of an IP address e no redistribution Use this keyword when the router is an NSSA Area Border Router ABR and you want the redistribute command to import routes only i
381. ngs F Enabled Copy IP Port Priority Settings M Enabled Source Interface E Port fi gt C Trunk z Potf a Trunk 3 Destination Interface 6 8 y Copy Settings CLI Does not support this operation 3 133 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Multicast Filtering 3 134 Multicasting is used to support real time y Unicast applications such as videoconferencing OR or streaming audio A multicast server E e lish rat Lo does not nave to estab s a separate S UL connection with each client It merely broadcasts its service to the network and Y AA CN EA Mu ae S any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch router Although this as Multicast Flow approach reduces the network overhead Ei required by a multicast server the OS broadcast traffic must be carefully El A pruned at every multicast switch router it F is gt passes through to ensure me traffic is O O C 4 a only passed on the hosts which subscribed to this service This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service This procedure is called multicas
382. ning tree configuration for the PE 4 160 SPANNING TREE COMMANDS spanning tree Use this command to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax spanning tree no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config 4 147 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree mode 4 148 Use this command to select the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs e Rapid Sp
383. nn eee eee 4 236 ip rip send version 6 oak eee ees 4 237 ip split horizon isana a eee eee 4 239 ip rip authentication key 1 2 0 0 eee eee eee 4 240 ip rip authentication mode 0 6 eee eee eee 4 241 show rip globals 0 cece cece eee 4 242 SNOW IP TIPS 4 5 towed E E Sede aan A ote E 4 242 Open Shortest Path First OSPF 0000000008 4 244 POuter OSPE nition acy a dad 4 246 LOMA ihc a ies hen A ane a O Mies 2 4 247 compatible ricl583 ansia it athe aa ot 4 248 default information originate 0 0 ee eee ee 4 248 E tion ea tet 4 250 ACUTE de dao WAG Medd Ao Gam Bid aha Bias Lengua 4 251 atea default COS miii id Aen Awe Garda 4 252 SUMA ty address ied il loe haces SY cade Li ds 4 253 redistiibuteno tada ica da 4 254 network area A Sct na pated eae 4 255 ATCA STUD Ses Spa iint Gates ai aond uae Rigid Mhake Need 4 257 afea MISSA A did Bag hoe he itn duds 4 258 area vittual link snien nr A e EN ce eee 4 260 ip ospf authentication 0 eee eee 4 263 ip ospf authentication key 0 eee eee eee 4 264 ip ospf message digest key 2 0 0 0 cece cece eee 4 265 IPOS PE COSE se Mee eed od ara 4 266 ip ospf dead interval 0 eee eee 4 267 ip ospf hello interval oooooooooooomoommo 4 268 CONTENTS IP OSPE PHOHTY ts 4 268 ip ospf retransmit interval ooo oocoooococcooooo 4 269 ip ospf transmit delay oooooccccooooooccccno ooo 4 270 Show ip ospi A R Wie isa
384. nnel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 Gvrp configuration Disabled Console garp timer Use this command to set the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall mer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall e join leave leaveall Which timer to set timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds 4 178 GVRP AND BRIDGE EXTENSION COMMANDS Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP tegistration deregistration Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Se
385. normal response occuts in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging Example IP INTEREACE COMMANDS Type ESC timeout response response response response response Minimum Console Console ping 10 1 0 9 to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets is 5 seconds time 10 ms time 10 ms time 10 ms time 10 ms time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 O packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Related Commands interface 4 119 Address Resolution Protocol ARP Command Function Mode Page arp Adds a static entry in the ARP cache GC 4 222 arp timeout Sets the time a dynamic entry remains in the GC 4 223 ARP cache clear arp cache Deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cacha PE 4 223 show atp Displays entries in the ARP cache NE 4 224 PE ip proxy arp Enables proxy ARP service VC 4 224 4 221 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE arp Use this command to add a static entry in the Address Resolution Protocol
386. ns The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state 3 95 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 96 Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port through which this switch acting as a designated bridge communicates with the attached LAN or host device Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 99 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 99 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge 1 e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports
387. nt to point networks 4 281 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Field Description Cost Interface transmit cost Transmit Delay Interface transmit delay in seconds State e Disabled OSPF not enabled on this interface e Down OSPF is enabled on this interface but interface is down e Loopback This is a loopback interface e Waiting Router is trying to find the DR and BDR e DR Designated Router State continued BDR Backup Designated Router DRother Interface is on a multiaccess network but is not the DR or BDR Priority Router priority Designated Router Designated router ID and respective interface address Backup Designated Router Backup designated router ID and respective interface address Timer intervals Configuration settings for timer intervals including Hello Dead and Retransmit show ip ospf neighbor 4 282 Syntax Use this command to display information about neighboring routers on each interface within an OSPF area show ip ospf neighbor Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ospf neighbor TO 1 252 Console 1 FULL DR 10 1 1 4252 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Field Description ID Neighbor s router ID Pri Neighbor s router priority State OSPF state and identification flag States include Down Connection down Attempt Connection down but attempti
388. nterface link in the route IP ROUTING Authentication Type Specifies the authentication type used for an interface Options None Simple password MD5 Default None Use authentication to prevent routers from inadvertently joining an unauthorized area Configure routers in the same area with the same password or key When using simple password authentication a password is included in the packet If it does not match the password configured on the receiving router the packet is discarded This method provides very little security as it is possible to learn the authentication key by snooping on routing protocol packets When using Message Digest 5 MD5 authentication the router uses the MD5 algorithm to verify data integrity by creating a 128 bit message digest from the authentication key Without the proper key and key id it is nearly impossible to produce any message that matches the prespecified target message digest The Authentication Key and Message Digest Key id must be used consistently throughout the autonomous system Note that the Message Digest Key id field is disabled when this authentication type is selected e Authentication Key Assign a plain text password used by neighboring routers to verify the authenticity of routing protocol messages Range 1 8 characters for simple password or 1 16 characters for MD5 authentication Default no key You can assign a unique password to each network i e a
389. nterfaces 3 155 4 216 enabling or disabling 3 154 4 226 status 3 154 4 226 unicast protocols 3 152 IP statistics 3 165 4 229 L link type STA 3 98 3 101 4 158 log in Web interface 3 3 logon authentication 3 28 4 60 RADIUS client 3 30 4 61 RADIUS server 3 30 4 61 logon authentication sequence 3 31 4 60 M main menu 3 5 mirror port configuring 3 70 4 133 multicast filtering 3 134 4 196 multicast groups 3 142 3 148 4 200 displaying 3 148 4 200 static 3 142 4 197 multicast routing 3 218 4 285 description 3 218 DVMRP 3 222 4 290 enabling 3 219 4 288 general commands 4 287 global settings 3 219 4 288 PIM DM 3 231 4 301 routing table 3 219 4 288 multicast services configuring 3 143 4 197 displaying 3 142 4 200 multicast static router port 3 140 4 286 O OSPF 3 186 4 244 area border router 3 189 4 251 AS summary route 3 208 4 253 autonomous system boundary router 3 189 4 249 backbone 3 192 4 256 default external route 3 190 4 248 general settings 3 188 4 244 normal area 3 192 4 255 NSSA 3 192 4 258 redistributing external routes 3 210 4 254 stub 3 192 4 257 transit area 3 192 4 260 virtual link 3 204 4 260 P password line 4 16 passwords 2 6 administrator setting 3 28 4 33 path cost 3 97 method 3 94 4 152 STA 3 97 4 152 PIM DM 3 231 4 301 configuring 3 231 4 301 global configuration 3 232 4 302 interface settings 3 233 4 303 4 308 neighbor routers
390. ntication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only Radius Local User authentication is attempted first using a RADIUS server then locally by the switch Local Radius User authentication is first attempted locally by the switch then using a RADIUS server Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 33 3 31 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click System Radius To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to two methods
391. nto normal areas and not into the NSSA In other words this keyword prevents the NSSA ABR from advertising external routing information learned via routers in other areas into the NSSA e default information originate When the router is an NSSA Area Border Router ABR or an NSSA Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR this parameter causes it to generate Type 7 default LSA into the NSSA This default provides a route to other areas within the AS for an NSSA ABR or to areas outside the AS for an NSSA ASBR Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting No NSSA is configured 4 258 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Usage All routers in a NSSA must be configured with the same area ID An NSSA is similar to a stub because when the router is an ABR it can send a default route for other areas in the AS into the NSSA using the default information originate keyword However an NSSA is different from a stub because when the router is an ASBR it can import a default external AS route for routing protocol domains adjacent to the NSSA but not within the OSPF AS into the NSSA using the default information originate keyword External routes advertised into an NSSA can include network destinations outside the AS learned via OSPF the default route static routes routes imported from other routing protocols such as RIP and networks directly connected to the router that are not running OSPF NSSA external LSAs Type 7 are conver
392. nutes Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the show arp command to display the current cache timeout value Example This example sets the ARP cache timeout for 15 minutes 1 e 900 seconds Console config arp timeout 900 Console config clear arp cache Use this command to delete all dynamic entries from the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all dynamic entries in the ARP cache Console clear arp cache This operation will delete all the dynamic entries in ARP Cache Are you sure to continue this operation y n y Console 4 223 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show arp Use this command to display entries in the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays information about the ARP cache The first line shows the cache timeout It also shows each cache entry including the corresponding IP address MAC address type static dynamic other and VLAN interface Note that entry type other indicates local addresses for this router Example This example displays all entries in the ARP cache Console show arp Arp cache timeout 1200 seconds IP Address MAC Address Type Interface 10 1 0 0 ff ff ff ff ff ff other 1 10 1 0 254 00 00 ab cd 00 00 other 1 10 1 0 255 EE ft ft fk gt b other 1 123 20 10 123 02 1
393. o point 4 161 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and 4 162 Groups state Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including 4 164 Interfaces ingress and egress tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and 4 172 Information MAC addtesses Configuring Private Configures private VLANs including uplink and 4 173 VLANs downlink ports Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add GC 4 162 change and delete VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name VC 4 163 and state vlan database 4 162 Use this command to enter VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None VLAN COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN sett
394. ode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config reload Use this command to restart the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 28 end exit GENERAL COMMANDS Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y Use this command to return to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration Router Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console Use this command to return to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any 4 29 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuratio
395. of users 5 e Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged e Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive CLI only Web Click System Passwords To change the password for the current user enter the old password enter the new password confirm it by entering it again then click Apply Passwords Old Password ia New Password ea Confirm Password CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 1 e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 33 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config 3 29 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 30 Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on the RADIUS protocol Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Web Telnet RADIUS server E console Ty pao RARE Aaa 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication s
396. ol the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate IC 4 136 for a port 4 135 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE rate limit 4 136 Use this command to define the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output raz no rate limit input output input Input rate output Output rate rate Maximum value in Mbps Default Setting Fast Ethernet interface 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet interface 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e The range is Fast Ethernet interface 1 to 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet interface 8 to 1000 Mbps Resolution The increment of change F
397. older product in its product line with one that incorporates these newer technologies At that point the obsolete product is discontinued and is no longer an Active SMC product A list of discontinued products with their respective dates of discontinuance can be found at http www smc com index cfm action customer_service_warranty All products that are replaced become the property of SMC Replacement products may be either new or reconditioned Any replaced or repaired product carries either a 30 day limited warranty or the remainder of the initial warranty whichever is longer SMC is not responsible for any custom software or firmware configuration information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on or integrated with any products returned to SMC pursuant to any warranty Products returned to SMC should have any customer installed accessory or add on components such as expansion modules removed prior to returning the product for replacement SMC is not responsible for these items if they are returned with the product Customers must contact SMC for a Return Material Authorization number prior to returning any product to SMC Proof of purchase may be required Any product returned to SMC without a valid Return Material Authorization RMA number clearly marked on the outside of the package will be returned to customer at customer s expense For warranty claims within North America please call our toll free customer support n
398. olled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Configuring the Logon Password on page 3 28 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program 3 1 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 2 Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct passwotd on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated If you log into the Web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the Web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 99 NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTEREACE Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the Web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your Web browser connects with the switch s Web agent the
399. ommand to control access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level ve 0 7 password no enable password level eve e level ve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used e 0 7 O means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration 4 34 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 25 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 25 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the Web GC 4 35 browser interface ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or GC 4 36 c
400. on 1 or 2 The switch must be set to version 2 to enable the Max Query Response Time MULTICAST FILTERING Querier Device currently serving as the IGMP querier for this multicast service Web Click IP IGMP Interface Settings Specify each interface that will support IGMP Layer 3 specify the IGMP parameters for each interface then click Apply IGMP Interface Information Max Last Admin y Robustness Query Query Member a interface Status Nenin Variable Interval Response Query Querer Cantigura Time Interval VLAN2 Enabled 2 2 125 10 1 10 1 0 253 Configure WLAN3 Enabled 2 2 125 10 1 10 1 5 253 Configure Entry Count 2 IGMP Interface Settings VLAN 2 y IGMP Protocol Status Enabled Query Interval seconds 125 Last Member Query Interval 0 25 i Robustness Variable 1 E seconds 1 255 E Max Query Response Time 0 25 gt seconds fio Version 2 3 147 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 148 CLI This example configures the IGMP parameters for VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 4 165 Console config 1f ip igmp 4 206 Console config if tip igmp last memb query interval 10 4 209 Console config if ip igmp max resp interval 20 4 208 Console config 1f ip igmp query interval 100 4 208 Console config 1if ip igmp robustval 3 4 207 Console config if ip igmp version 1 4 210 Console config if end Console show ip igmp interface vlan 1 4 211 Vian is
401. on any interface Layer 3 IGMP should also be enabled on the router page 3 144 If DVMRP is disabled the interface cannot propagate IP multicast routing information However as long as IGMP snooping is enabled the interface will still forward multicast traffic to downstream group members within the VLAN But if IGMP snooping is disabled then the interface will flood incoming multicast traffic to all ports in the attached VLAN Web Click Routing Protocol DVMRP Interface Settings Select a VLAN from the drop down box under DVMRP Interface Settings modify the Metric if required set the Status to Enabled or Disabled and click Apply DVMRP Interface Information Interface Address Metric Status WLAN1 10 1 0 253 1 Enabled VLAN2 10 1 1 253 1 Enabled Entry Count 2 DVMRP Interface Settings VLAN q Metric 1 31 Status Disabled v CLI This example enables DVMRP and sets the metric for VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 4 119 Console config if ip dvmrp 4 296 Console config 1if ip dvmrp metric 2 4 297 Console config if end Console show ip dvmrp interface 4 301 Vlan is up DVMRP is enabled Metric is 2 Console MULTICAST ROUTING Displaying Neighbor Information You can display all the neighboring DVMRP routers Command Attributes Neighbor Address The IP address of the network device immediately upstream for this multicast delivery tree Interface T
402. on used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege guest 0 admin 15 Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 00 00 1 vty 0 admin 0 04 37 10 1 0 19 Console show version Use this command to display hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 14 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command 4 52 FLASH FILE COMMANDS Example Console show version Unit1 Serial number EDITII 1111 Service tag Hardware version ROA Number of ports 726 Main power status Up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit id Si Loader version 1 0 0 0 Boot rom version e 0 yen Operation code version 1 0 1 3 Console Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to PE 4 53 or from flash memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 56 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 57 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 58 boot system Specifies the fi
403. onfig if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if ttip access group david in Console config if 3 49 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as SMC s EliteView Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication The options for configuring community strings and related trap functions are described in the following sections Setting Community Access Strings 3 50 You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability
404. onfig if idescription RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex Use this command to configure the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex e 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 100half for 100BASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 120 INTEREACE COMMANDS Command Usage e To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console config interface ethernet 1
405. onfiguration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP can dynamically allocate an IP address and other configuration information to network clients when they boot up If a subnet does not already include a BOOTP or DHCP server you can relay DHCP client requests to a DHCP server on another subnet or configure the DHCP server on this switch to support that subnet When configuring the DHCP server on this switch you can configure an address pool for each unique IP interface or manually assign a static IP address to clients based on their hardware address or client identifier The DHCP server can provide the host s IP address domain name gateway router and DNS server information about the host s boot image including the TFTP server to access for download and the name of the boot file or boot information for NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service WINS Configuring DHCP Relay Service This switch supports DHCP telay service for attached host devices If DHCP relay is jajajaj are La LEE enabled and this DHCP Provides IP address Server switch sees a DHCP compatible with switch i EF segment to which client request broadcast it is attached inserts its own IP address into the request so that the DHCP server will know the subnet where the client is located Then the switch forwards the packet to the DHCP server When the server receives the DHCP request it allocates a
406. onfigured from a browset ip http port Use this command to specify the TCP port number used by the Web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 4 35 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 36 ip http server 4 36 Use this command to allow this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax ip http server no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 35 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 37 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory GC 4 38 based on severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 39 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4 40 logging on Use this command to control logging of error messages This command sends debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process S
407. ons 4 97 Interface Configures the connection parameters for all 4 118 Ethernet ports aggregated links and VLANs Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without 4 133 affecting the data passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or 4 135 received on a port Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical 4 137 trunk configures Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified 4 141 4 11 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 12 Bridge Extension Command Group Description Page Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 146 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port 4 162 membership for VLAN groups also enables or configures private VLANs GVRP and Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic 4 175 VLAN learning shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames relative weight 4 181 for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query 4 196 parameters and specifies ports attached to a multicast router IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch interfaces also 4 215 configures ARP parameters and static entries IP
408. onsole show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status Eth 1 Console Perra Precedence COS SOON RO ANDUOBWNOO disabled 4 189 4 119 4 189 4 194 3 128 Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes apply to the all interfaces on the switch CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NP olala oln elo Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces 3 129 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Priority
409. oooo ooooooo 3 230 Configuring PIM DM 0 0 3 231 Configuring Global PIM DM Settings 3 232 Configuring PIM DM Interface Settings 3 233 Displaying Interface Information 044 3 236 Displaying Neighbor Information 4 3 237 Command Line Interface o ooooooooooo o o 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface 0 6 eee oo 4 1 Accessing the CLE init tania 4 1 Console C nnecton tas o Me ak 4 1 Telnet ConnecttOn restas raar aaa E eee te ee ties 4 2 Entering Commands senars yo ante Ya tages Ed tage ee 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 1 1 2 0 cece cece eee 4 3 xi CONTENTS Minimum Abbreviation 0000 0 eee eee 4 4 Command Completion 00 606 cece cece ce eee eee 4 4 Getting Help on Commands 000 cece eee 4 4 Showing Commands 0 4 5 Partial Keyword Lookup 0 0 00 c cece eee eee 4 6 Negating the Effect of Commands 00000 00 4 6 Using Command History 0 6 0 0 eee eee 4 6 Understanding Command Modes 00 00000 c eee 4 6 Fxeci ommands icc acct tind dat Adie ee 4 7 Configuration Commands sses cece cee ee eee 4 8 Command Line Processing 0 0 usss cece eee eee 4 10 Command Groups ui da ls a ea Sek 4 11 EMS Commands ici sii 4 13 MEA A A O EN da cd 4 14 A are n a a el decks whee dsb sla ian oe Ado need debit 4 15 password oye O Pe AR 4 16 CXCG UMEOUT 22 55 Mia ai 4 17 password thresh 2
410. or all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses 3 84 A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address e MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Web Only ADDRESS TABLE SETTINGS Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 y Trunk y MAC Address VLAN fi y Add Static Address Remove Static Address CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted wh
411. or not system logging has been enabled via the logging on command e History logging in FLASH RAM The message level s that are reported based on the logging history command e Any system and event messages stored in memory Example SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 and lists one sample error Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enable History logging in FLASH level errors LOI 0 03 5 1 1721 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enable History logging in RAM level debugging 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP or by using information broadcast by local time servers Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 42 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 43 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 44 sntp broadcast Accepts time from any time broadcast server GC 4 45 client show sntp Shows curren
412. ore removing this entry from the routing table This timer allows neighbors to become aware of an invalid route prior to purging Default 120 seconds Web Click Routing Protocol RIP General Settings Enable or disable RIP set the RIP version used on previously unset interfaces to RIPv1 or RIPv2 set the basic update timer and then click Apply General Settings Global RIP Routing Process Enabled v Global RIP Version RIP y Timer Update 15 60 seconds 15 4 Timeout Update x 6 390 Garbage Collection Update x 4 60 gt z 3 177 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 178 CLI This example sets the router to use RIP Version 2 and sets the basic timer to 15 seconds Console config router rip 4 231 Console config router version 2 4 235 Console config router ttimers basic 15 4 232 Console config router end Console show rip globals 4 242 RIP Process Enabled Update Time in Seconds 15 Number of Route Change 0 Number of Queries 1 Console Specifying Network Interfaces for RIP You must specify network interfaces that will be included in the RIP routing process Command Usage RIP only sends updates to interfaces specified by this command e Subnet addresses are interpreted as class A B or C based on the first field in the specified address In other words if a subnet address NNN XXX XXX XXx is entered the first field nnn determines the class e 0 127 is class A and only the fir
413. ort is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass 3 97 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web
414. ot be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is unassigned by default Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator e IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address p address netmask IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt whete ip address is the switch 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config 1f ttip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config 2 7 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 8 Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore n
415. outer Range 0 255 4 268 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting 1 Command Usage e Set the priority to zero to prevent a router from being elected as a DR or BDR If set to any value other than zero the router with the highest priority will become the DR and the router with the next highest priority becomes the BDR If two or more routers are tied with the same highest priority the router with the higher ID will be elected e Ifa DR already exists for an area when this interface comes up the new router will accept the current DR regardless of its own priority The DR will not change until the next time the election process is initiated Example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip ospf priority 5 Console config if ip ospf retransmit interval Use this command to specify the time between resending link state advertisements LSAs Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip ospf retransmit interval seconds no ip ospf retransmit interval seconds Sets the interval at which LSAs are retransmitted from this interface Range 1 65535 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting 5 seconds 4 269 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage A router will resend an LSA to a neighbor if it receives no acknowledgment The retransmit interval should be set to a conservative value that provides an adequate flow
416. outer Use the no form to disable it Syntax router ospf no router ospf Command Mode Global Configuration Default Setting Disabled Command Usage e OSPF is used to specify how routers exchange routing table information This command is also used to enter router configuration mode Example Console config router ospf Console config router Related Commands network area 4 255 IP ROUTING COMMANDS routet id Use this command to assign a unique router ID for this device within the autonomous system Use the no form to use the default router identification method ie the lowest interface address Syntax router id 7p address no router id ip address Router ID formatted as an IP address Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting Lowest interface address Command Usage The router ID must be unique for every router in the autonomous system Using the default setting based on the lowest interface address ensures that each router ID is unique Also note that you cannot set the router ID to 0 0 0 0 or 255 255 255 255 If this router already has registered neighbors the new router ID will be used when the router is rebooted or manually restarted by entering the no router ospf followed by the router ospf command If the priority values of the routers bidding to be the designated router or backup designated router for an area are equal the router with the highest I
417. ow ip interface 4 219 Vlan 1 is up addressing mode is Dhcp Interface address is 10 1 0 253 mask is 255 255 255 0 Primary MTU is 1500 bytes Proxy ARP is disabled Split horizon is enabled Console Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the Web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the Web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart client 4 98 3 21 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Managing Firmware 3 22 You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names o
418. p process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes dotlx Re authentication Indicates if switch port requires a client to be re authenticated after a certain period of time dotlx Max Request Count The maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Timeout for Quiet Period Indicates the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Timeout for Re authentication Period Indicates the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Timeout for TX Period The time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Supplicant timeout The time the switch waits for a client response to an EAP request USER AUTHENTICATION Server timeout The time the switch waits for a response from the authentication server RADIUS to an authentication request Re authentication Max Count The number of times the switch will attempt to re authenticate a connected client before the port becomes unauthorized Web Click dot1x dot1x Information dot1X Information dot1X Re authentication Disabled dot1X Max Request Count 2 Timeout for Quiet Period 60 seconds Timeout for Re authentication
419. pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using four priority queues with Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES IP Routing The switch provides Layer 3 IP routing To maintain a high rate of throughput the switch forwards all traffic passing within the same segment and routes only traffic that passes between different subnetworks The wire speed routing provided by this switch lets you easily link network segments or VLANs together without having to deal with the bottlenecks or configuration hassles normally associated with conventional rout
420. pe depends on the requirements of your DHCP server Example Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip dhcp client identifier hex 00 00 e8 66 65 72 Console config if Related Commands ip dhep restart client 4 98 ip dhcp restart client Use this command to submit a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available 4 98 DHCP CoMMANDS Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if exit Console ip dhcp restart client Console show ip interface Vlan 1 is up addressing mode is Dhcp Interface address is 10 1 0 254 mask is 255 255 255 0 Primary MTU is 1500 bytes Proxy ARP is disabled Split horizon is enabled Console Related Commands ip address 4 216 DHCP Relay Command Function Mode Page ip dhcp restart Enables DHCP relay agent IC 4 99 relay ip dhcp relay Specifies DHCP server addresses for relay IC 4 10
421. pology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around one tenth of the time required by STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs SPANNING TREE ALGORITHM CONFIGURATION Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes e Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system e Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces
422. pped to a physical address If this occurs you can manually map an IP address to the corresponding physical address in the ARP Command Usage e You can define up to 128 static entries in the ARP cache Static entries will not be aged out or deleted when power is reset You can only remove a static entry via the configuration interface Command Attributes IP Address IP address statically mapped to a physical MAC address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods IP ROUTING MAC Address MAC address statically mapped to the corresponding IP address Valid MAC addresses are hexadecimal numbers in the format XX XX XX XX XX XX Entry Count The number of static entries in the ARP cache Web Click IP ARP Static Addresses Enter the IP address the corresponding MAC address and click Apply Static Addresses Current IP address MAC address Interface 10 1 0 11 00 11 22 33 44 55 1 lt lt Add IP Address Remove MAC Address Entry Count 1 z CLI This example sets a static entry for the ARP cache Cansole config arp 10 1 0 11 00 11 22 33 44 55 4 222 Console config Displaying Dynamically Learned ARP Entries The ARP cache contains entries that map IP addresses to the corresponding physical address Most of these entries will be dynamically learned through replies to broadcast messages You can display all of the dynamic entries i
423. provides a mechanism for transmitting blocks of data often called packets or frames from a source to a destination where these network devices i e hosts are identified by fixed length addresses The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long packets if necessary for transmission through small packet networks 3 165 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 166 Statistical Values Parameter Description Packets Received The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error Received Address Errors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in the header s destination field was not a valid address for this entity Received Packets The number of input datagrams for which no problems Discarded were encountered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded e g for lack of buffer space Output Requests The total number of datagrams which local IP user protocols including ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission Output Packet No The number of datagrams discarded because no route Route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down Datagrams Forwarded The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final IP destination as a result of which an
424. ption if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled e Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled 3 101 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or STA Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Priority Path Cost eae Port STA State 0 240 1 Admin Link Type Fast Migration Trunk 200000000 Forwarding 1 Forwarding he fiooooo ato y l Enabled
425. r Send Version for an interface overrides the global setting specified by the RIP General Settings Global RIP Version field e You can specify the Receive Version based on these options Use RIPv1 or RIPv2 if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or RIPv2 respectively Use RIPv1 or RIPv2 if some routers in the local network are using RIPv2 but there are still some older routers using RIPv1 Use Do Not Receive if you do not want to add any dynamic entries to the routing table for an interface For example you may only want to allow static routes for a specific interface e You can specify the Send Version based on these options Use RIPv1 or RIPv2 if all routers in the local network are based on RIPv1 or RIPv2 respectively Use RIPv1 Compatible to propagate route information by broadcasting to other routers on the network using the RIPv2 advertisement list instead of multicasting as normally required by RIPv2 Using this mode allows RIPv1 routers to receive these protocol messages but still allows RIPv2 routers to receive the additional information provided by RIPv2 including subnet mask next hop and authentication information Use Do Not Send to passively monitor route information advertised by other routers attached to the network Loopback Prevention Just as Layer 2 switches use the Spanning Tree Algorithm to prevent loops routers also use methods
426. r configuration mode Make any changes necessary to the global DVMRP parameters Then specify the interfaces that will support DVMRP multicast routing using the ip dvmrp command and set the metric for each interface Example Console config router dvmrp Console config router end Console show router dvmrp Admin Status enable Probe Interval 2 10 Nbr expire 1 35 Minimum Flash Update Interval SAD prune lifetime 7200 route report 60 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Metric of Default Gateway 200 Console 4 291 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands ip dvmrp 4 296 show router dvmrp 4 298 probe interval Use this command to set the interval for sending neighbor probe messages to the multicast group address for all DVMRP routers Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax probe interval seconds seconds Interval between sending neighbor probe messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Router Configuration Command Usage Probe messages are sent to neighboring DVMRP routers from which this device has received probes and is used to verify whether or not these neighbors are still active members of the multicast tree Example Console config router probe interval 30 Console config router 4 292 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS nbr timeout Use this command to set the interval to wait for messages from a DVMRP neighbor before declaring it dead U
427. r from the router e Before you configure any network interfaces on this router you should first create a VLAN for each unique user group or for each network application and its associated users Then assign the ports associated with each of these VLANs e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the router to existing IP subnets 4 216 IP INTEREACE COMMANDS You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program e An interface can have only one primary IP address but can have many secondary IP addresses In other words you will need to specify secondary addresses if more than one IP subnet can be accessed via this interface If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart client command or by rebooting the router Notes 1 Each VLAN group can be assigned its own IP interface address Therefore if routing is enabled you
428. r name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e There are three authentication modes provided by the switch at login login selects authentication by a single elobal password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS software installed on those servers 4 15 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 33 password 4 16 password Use this command to specify the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password e 0 7 O means plain password 7 means encrypted password e password Character string that specifies the line password
429. r of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display 4 46 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 45 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show Displays the contents of the configuration file PE 4 47 startup config stored in flash memory that is used to start up the system show Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 49 running config show system Displays system information NE 4 51 PE show usets Shows all active console and Telnet sessions NE 4 51 including user name idle time and IP address of PE Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE 4 52 PE show startup config Use this command to display the configuration file stored in non volatile memoty that
430. r will resend an LSA to a neighbor if it receives no acknowledgment The retransmit interval should be set to a conservative value that provides an adequate flow of routing information but does not produce unnecessary protocol traffic Note that this value should be larger for virtual links Set this interval to a value that is greater than the round trip delay between any two routers on the attached network to avoid unnecessary retransmissions Hello Interval Sets the interval between sending hello packets on an interface Range 1 65535 seconds Default 10 This interval must be set to the same value for all routers on the network Using a smaller Hello interval allows changes in the network topology to be discovered more quickly but may result in more routing traffic Rtr Dead Interval Sets the interval at which hello packets are not seen before neighbors declare the router down This interval must be set to the same value for all routers on the network Range 1 65535 seconds Default 40 or 4 times the Hello Interval Cost Sets the cost of sending a packet on an interface where higher values indicate slower ports Range 1 65535 Default 1 This router uses a default cost of 1 for all ports Therefore if you install a Gigabit module you need to reset the cost for all of the 100 Mbps ports to some value greater than 1 Routes are subsequently assigned a metric equal to the sum of all metrics for each i
431. rame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console Configuring Port Mirroring 3 70 You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time Sar lysis You can then attach a logic E ee a Source Single analyzer or RMON probe to the target port s target port and study the traffic crossing the port soutce port in a completely unobtrusive manner Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored PORT CONFIGURATION Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both e Target Port The port that will duplicate or mirror the traffic on the source port Web Click Port Mirror Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 10 Both Destination 1 13 eee Source Port 1 y
432. ration code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded MANAGING SYSTEM FILES Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file 2 13 INITIAL CONFIGURATION 2 14 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent Using a Web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard Web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 17 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is contr
433. ration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A colon is required after the specified file type e If the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 4 57 whichboot 4 58 4 59 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1x Command Group Function Page Authentication Defines logon authentication method and 4 60 Sequence precedence RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a remote 4 62 server Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports 4 67 using 802 1x Authentication Sequence Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and GC 4 60 precedence authentication login Use this command to define the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius no authentication login e local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only Default Setting Local 4 6
434. relay server If there is no gateway in the client request 1 e the request was not forwarded by a relay server the switch searches for a network pool matching the interface through which the client request was received It then searches for a manually configured host address that falls within the matching network pool If no manually configured host address is found it assigns an address from the matching network address pool However if no matching address pool is found the request is ignored e When searching for a manual binding the switch compares the client identifier and then the hardware address for DHCP clients Since BOOTP clients cannot transmit a client identifier you must configure a hardware address for this host type If no manual binding has been specified for a host entry with a hardware address or client identifier the switch will assign an address from the first matching network pool If the subnet mask is not specified for network or host address pools the class A B or C natural mask is used see page 3 178 The DHCP server assumes that all host addresses are available You can exclude subsets of the address space by using the IP Excluded Address field on the DHCP Server General configuration page 3 57 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 58 Command Attributes Creating a New Address Pool Pool Name A string or integer Range 1 8 characters Setting the Network Parameters IP The IP address of
435. revious querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Default 2 Range 1 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings required and click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Status Enable Act as IGMP Querier F Enable IGMP Query Count 2 10 e IGMP Query Interval 60 125 125 seconds IGMP Report Delay 5 30 10 seconds IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds IGMP Version 2 MULTICAST FILTERING CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 4 197 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 4 201 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 4 202 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 4 203 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 4 203 Console config ip igmp snooping query time out 300 4 204 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 4 198 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 4 199 Igmp Snooping Configuration
436. ria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extend ACL Name mike Sre Dst Dst Sre Dst Control Control Action Address S eMask Addres Mask Port Port Code BitMask Remove Permit 19740 12552552850 any Any e Any Any any Any pp 2 Denes DIA 255 256 2560 any Any Any eq any any Rens Src IP lp 2 Src Address 192 168 1 0 Src SubMask 255 255 255 0 Dst IP Any y Dst Address J Sre SubMask Protocol TCP CUDP I7 Others Sre Port Dst Port Control Code 2 Control BitMask 2 Add CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP ACCESS CONTROL LISTS 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 79 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any dport 80 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any tcp control code 2 2 Console config std acl Configuring a MAC ACL Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination ma
437. rk address pools only If the mask is not specified the class A B or C natural mask is used see page 3 178 The DHCP server assumes that all host addresses are available You can exclude subsets of the address space by using the ip dhcp excluded address command Example Console config dhcp network 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 Console config dhcp default router Use this command to specify default routers for a DHCP pool Use the no form to remove the default routers Syntax default router address address2 no default router address Specifies the IP address of the primary router address2 Specifies the IP address of an alternate router Default Setting None 4 106 DHCP COMMANDS Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Usage Guidelines The IP address of the router should be on the same subnet as the client You can specify up to two routers Routers are listed in order of preference starting with address as the most preferred router Example Console config dhcp default router 10 1 0 54 10 1 0 64 Console config dhcp domain name Use this command to specify the domain name for a DHCP client Use the no form to remove the domain name Syntax domain name domain no domain name domain Specifies the domain name of the client Range 1 32 characters Default Setting None Command Mode DHCP Pool Configuration Example Console config dhcp domain name samp
438. ropagating the RC 4 293 complete set of routing tables to other neighbor routers flash update interval Sets the interval for sending updates about RC 4 294 changes to network topology prune lifetime Defines how long a prune state remains in RC 4 294 effect fot a source touted multicast tree default gateway Configures the default gateway for IP RC 4 295 multicast routing ip dvmrp Enables DVMRP on the specified interface IC 4 296 ip dvmrp metric Sets the metric used when establishing IC 4 297 reverse paths to some networks on directly attached interfaces clear ip dvmrp route Clears all dynamic routes in the multicast PE 4 298 routing table show router dvmrp Displays global DVMRP configuration NE 4 298 settings PE 4 290 MULTICAST ROUTING COMMANDS Command Function Mode Page show ip dvmrp route Displays DVMRP routing information NE 4 299 PE show ip dvmrp Displays DVMRP neighbor information NE 4 300 neighbor PE show ip dvmrp Displays DVMRP configuration settings NE 4 301 interface for the interfaces PE router dvmrp Use this command to enable Distance Vector Multicast Routing DVMRP globally for the router and to enter router configuration mode Use the no form to disable DVMRP multicast routing Syntax router dvmrp no router dvmrp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command enables DVMRP globally for the router and enters route
439. roup They also rely on messages sent from IGMP enabled Layer 2 switches and hosts to determine when hosts want to join or leave multicast groups DVMRP builds a source rooted multicast delivery tree that allows it to prevent looping and determine the shortest path to the source of the multicast traffic PIM also builds a source rooted multicast delivery tree for each multicast source but uses information from the router s unicast routing table instead of maintaining its own multicast routing table making MULTICAST ROUTING it routing protocol independent Also note that the Dense Mode version of PIM is supported on this router because it is suitable for densely populated multicast groups which occur primarily in the LAN environment If DVMRP and PIM DM are not enabled on this router or another multicast routing protocol is used on your network you can manually configure the switch ports attached to a multicast router page 3 140 Configuring Global Settings for Multicast Routing To use multicast routing on this router you must first globally enable multicast routing as described in this section globally enable DVRMP page 3 223 or PIM page 3 232 and specify the interfaces that will participate page 3 227 or 3 233 Note that you can only enable one multicast routing protocol on any given interface Web Click IP Multicast Routing General Setting Set Multicast Forwarding Status to Enabled and click Apply Multicas
440. routes for the specified protocol Range 1 65535 Default 10 type value e 1 Type 1 external route 2 Type 2 external route default Routers do not add internal route metric to external route metric Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting redistribution none protocol RIP and static metric value 0 type metric 2 Command Usage e This router supports redistribution for both RIP and static routes e When you redistribute external routes into an OSPF autonomous system AS the router automatically becomes an autonomous system boundaty router ASBR If the redistribute command is used in conjunction with the default information originate command to generate a default external route into the AS the metric value specified in this command supersedes the metric specified in the default information originate command 4 254 IP ROUTING COMMANDS e Metric type specifies the way to advertise routes to destinations outside the AS via External LSAs Specify Type 1 to add the internal cost metric to the external route metric In other words the cost of the route from any router within the AS is equal to the cost associated with reaching the advertising ASBR plus the cost of the external route Specify Type 2 to only advertise the external route metric Example This example redistributes routes learned from RIP as Type 1 external routes Console config router redistribute rip metric type 1 Con
441. rt Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Port Mirroring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 6 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP 1 1 INTRODUCTION Feature Description Broadcast Storm Control Supported Address Table Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table 100 static MAC addresses per port Up to 2K IP address entries 128 static IP addresses in the ARP cache 256 static IP routes IEEE 802 1D Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Bridge Store and Forward Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating Switching bad frames Spanning Tree Supports standard STP and the new Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Protocol RSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q or private VLANs Traffic Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Prioritization Precedence Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port IP Routing Routing Information Protocol RIP Open Shortest Path First OSPF static routes ARP Static and dynamic address configuration proxy ARP Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query for Layer 2 and IGMP for Layer 3 Multicast Routing Supports DVMRP and PIM DM Description of Software Features 1 2 The switch provides
442. s Specifies IP addresses that the DHCP server should not assign to DHCP clients You can specify a single address or an address range Note Be sure you exclude the address for this switch and other key network devices Web Click DHCP Server General Enter a single address or an address range and click Add General DHCP Server Enabled y Excluding Address New 10 1 0 250 10 1 0 254 lt lt Add Low Remove High optional Entry Count 1 CLI This example enables the DHCP and sets an excluded address range Console config service dhcp 4 103 Console config ip dhcp excluded address 10 1 0 250 10 41 05 254 4 104 Console 3 56 Dynamic Host CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL Configuring Address Pools You must configure IP address pools for each IP interface that will provide addresses to attached clients via the DHCP server Command Usage e First configure address pools for the network interfaces Then you can manually bind an address to a specific client if required However note that any static host address must fall within the range of an existing network address pool You can configure up to 8 network address pools and up to 32 manually bound host address pools 1 e one address per host pool e When a client request is received the switch first checks for a network address pool matching the gateway where the request originated i e if the request was forwarded by a
443. s such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if VLAN COMMANDS switchport native vlan Use this command to configure the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan v an id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group e If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if 4 169 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE switchport allowed vlan Use this command to configure
444. s 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes 3 77 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 78 Command Usage Due to a switch chip limitation the input rate limit can only be enabled or disabled globally for all interfaces on the switch However the output rate limit can be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces Command Attribute e Rate Limit Sets the input or output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate Fast Ethernet 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps Range Fast Ethernet 1 100 Mbps at a resolution of 1 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1 1000 Mbps at an resolution of 8 Mbps Web Click Rat
445. s dhcp 1 line console i line vty i end Console Related Commands show running config 4 49 show running config Use this command to display the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode symbols and includes the configuration cy group is separated by mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface IP address configured for VLANs 4 49 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Routing protocol configuration settings Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show running config building running config please wait 1 snmp server community private rw snmp server community public ro 1 H username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d
446. s is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes e IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled 3 137 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 138 e Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Disabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 30 seconds Default 10 Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the p
447. s the cost of sending a packet onan IC 4 266 interface ip ospf Sets the interval at which hello packets are not IC 4 267 dead interval seen before neighbors declare the router down ip ospf Specifies the interval between sending hello IC 4 268 hello interval packets ip ospf priority Sets the router priority used to determine the IC 4 268 designated router ip ospf Specifies the time between resending a IC 4 269 retransmit interval link state advertisement ip ospf Estimates time to send a link state update IC 4 270 transmit delay packet over an interface Display Information show ip ospf Displays general information about the routing PE 4 271 processes show ip ospf Displays routing table entries for Area Border PE 4 272 border routers Routers ABR and Autonomous System Boundary Routers ASBR show ip ospf Shows information about different LSAs in the PE 4 273 database database show ip ospf Displays interface information PE 4 281 interface show ip ospf Displays neighbor information PE 4 282 neighbor 4 245 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Function Mode Page show ip ospf Displays all summary address redistribution PE 4 283 summaty address information show ip ospf Displays parameters and the adjacency state of PE 4 284 virtual links virtual links router ospf 4 246 Use this command to enable Open Shortest Path First OSPF routing for all IP interfaces on the r
448. s the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Flow Control Status Indicates type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None e Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP 1 Port Information only 2 Trunk Information only Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information PortName Type Staus Status Statur Statue Attonegatiation member 1 DOBase TX Enabled Up 100full None Enabled 2 DOBase TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled 3 DOBase TX Enabled Up 100full None Enabled 4 DOBase TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled 5 100Base TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled 6 DOBase TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled 7 OO0Base TX Enabled Up 100full None Enabled 8 00Base TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled y 9 OOBase TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled 10 OOBase TX Enabled Down 100full None Enabled y Field Attributes CLI Basic information Port type Indicates the port type 100OBASE T 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX MAC Address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the Web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 17 Configuration e Name Interface label e Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or di
449. s the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP e Src Dst Port TCP or UDP source destination port number Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 e Control Bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 3 45 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 46 Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required crite
450. s which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click System Bridge Extension Enable or disable GVRP click Apply Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning IVL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No Trafic Classes IF Enable GMRP F Enable GVRP F Enable de CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 175 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch 3 107 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Only Web Click VLAN VLAN Base Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maxirnum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 176 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic
451. sabled i e up or down PORT CONFIGURATION Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the Web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled Current status Link Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down Port Operation Status Provides detailed information on port state Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none 3 65 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 66 CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 13 Console show interfa
452. sco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS lacp Use this command to enable 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax lacp no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails 4 139 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 140 Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11 13 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port ch
453. se help any NA Shows options for command completion context any NA 4 24 GENERAL COMMANDS enable Use this command to activate Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Syntax enable eve level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 34 The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 26 enable password 4 34 4 25 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE disable 4 26 Use this command to return to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exe
454. se the no form to restore the default value Syntax nbr timeout seconds seconds Interval before declaring a neighbor dead Range 1 65535 Default Setting 35 seconds Command Mode Router Configuration Command Usage This command is used for timing out routes and for setting the children and leaf flags Example Console config router nbr timeout 40 Console config router report interval Use this command to specify how often to propagate the complete set of routing tables to other neighbor DVMRP routers Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax report interval seconds seconds Interval between sending the complete set of routing tables Range 1 65535 Default Setting 60 seconds 4 293 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Router Configuration Example Console config router report interval 90 Console config router flash update interval Use this command to specify how often to send trigger updates which reflect changes in the network topology Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax flash update interval seconds seconds Interval between sending flash updates when network topology changes have occurred Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 seconds Command Mode Router Configuration Example Console config router flash update interval 10 Console config router prune lifetime Use this command to specify
455. se the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl Related Commands permit deny 4 78 ip access group 4 81 show ip access list 4 83 4 77 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE permit deny Standard ACL Use this command to add a tule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax permit deny any source bitmask host source no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and anot
456. sername name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 access level level Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopasswotd No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting The default access level is Normal Exec The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration 4 33 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place Use this c
457. sk Network mask of the address range to add to the area e Area ID Area to which the specified address or range is assigned An OSPF area identifies a group of routers that share common routing information The area ID must be in the form of an IP address Note This router supports up to 16 total areas either normal transit areas stubs or NSSAs Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Network Area Address Configuration Configure a backbone area that is contiguous with all the other areas in your network configure an area for all of the other OSPF interfaces then click Apply Network Area Address Configuration Current Network Address Entries IP Address Netmask ArealD Remove 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 1 10 1 2 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 2 alolala 10 1 3 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 3 Entry Count 4 Remove Network Address Settings IP Address Netmask Area ID 3 207 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 208 CLI This example configures the backbone area and one transit area Console config router network 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 4 255 Console config router network 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 area 0 0 0 1 Console config router end Console show ip ospf 4 271 Routing Process with 1D 10 1 1 253 Supports only single TOS TOSO route Number of area in this router is 4 Area 0 0 0 0 BACKBONE Number of interfaces in this area is SPF algorithm executed 8 ti
458. sole config router Related Commands default information originate 4 248 network atea Use this command to define an OSPF area and the interfaces that operate within this area Use the no form to disable OSPF for a specified interface Syntax network p address netmask area area id no network 7p address netmask area area id ip address Address of the interfaces to add to the area netmask Network mask of the address range to add to the area e area id Area to which the specified address or range is assigned An OSPF area identifies a group of routers that share common routing information The area ID must be in the form of an IP address Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting Disabled 4 255 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 256 Command Usage An area ID uniquely defines an OSPF broadcast area The area ID 0 0 0 0 indicates the OSPF backbone for an autonomous system Each router must be connected to the backbone via a direct connection or a virtual link Set the area ID to the same value for all routers on a network segment using the network mask to add one or more interfaces to an area Be sure to include the primary address for an interface in the network area otherwise OSPF will not operate for any secondary addresses covered by the command An interface can only be assigned to a single area If an address range is overlapped in subsequent network area commands the router will implement
459. ss Use this command to specify IP addresses that the DHCP server should not assign to DHCP clients Use the no form to remove the excluded IP addresses Syntax ip dhcp excluded address ow address high address no ip dhcp excluded address ow address high address e lom address An excluded IP address or the first IP address in an excluded address range higb address The last IP address in an excluded address range Default Setting All IP pool addresses may be assigned Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip dhcp excluded address 10 1 0 19 Console config ip dhcp pool Use this command to configure a DHCP address pool and enter DHCP Pool Configuration mode Use the no form to remove the address pool Syntax ip dhcp pool name no ip dhcp pool same name A string or integer Range 1 8 characters Default Setting DHCP address pools are not configured 4 104 DHCP COMMANDS Command Mode Global Configuration Usage Guidelines e After executing this command the switch changes to DHCP Pool Configuration mode identified by the config dhcp prompt e From this mode first configure address pools for the network interfaces using the network command You can also manually bind an address to a specific client with the host command if required You can configure up to 8 network address pools and up to 32 manually bound host address pools i e listing one host addr
460. ssages and to tag outgoing routing messages Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip rip authentication key small Console config if Related Commands ip tip authentication mode 4 241 IP ROUTING COMMANDS ip rip authentication mode Use this command to specify the type of authentication that can be used on an interface Note that the current firmware version only supports a simple password Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax ip rip authentication mode text no ip rip authentication mode text Indicates that a simple password will be used Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Default Setting No authentication Command Usage e The password to be used for authentication is specified in the ip rip authentication key command page 4 240 This command requires the interface to exchange routing information with other routers based on an authorized password Note that this command only applies to RIPv2 e For authentication to function properly both the sending and receiving interface must be configured with the same password or authentication key Example This example sets the authentication mode to plain text Console config interface vlan 1 Console config 1f tip rip authentication mode text Console config if Related Commands ip rip authentication key 4 240 4 241 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show rip globals Use this comm
461. st forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device e This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if 4 157 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 156 spanning tree link type 4 158 Use this command to configure the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be ona shared link RSTP only works on point to point links between two bri
462. st create VLANs for each unique user group or application traffic page 3 110 assign all ports that belong to the same group to these VLANs page 3 111 and then assign an IP interface to each VLAN page 3 155 By separating the network into different VLANs it can be partitioned into subnetworks that are disconnected at Layer 2 Network traffic within the same subnet is still switched using Layer 2 switching And the VLANs can now be interconnected only as required with Layer 3 switching Each VLAN represents a virtual interface to Layer 3 You just need to provide the network address for each virtual interface and the traffic between different subnetworks will be routed by Layer 3 switching Inter subnet traffic Layer 3 switching Routing Untagged Untagged nae or ae Tagged or Untagged VY fr Intra subnet traffic Layer 2 switching IP ROUTING IP Switching IP Switching or packet forwarding encompasses tasks required to forward packets for both Layer 2 and Layer 3 as well as traditional routing These functions include Layer 2 forwarding switching based on the Layer 2 destination MAC address Layer 3 forwarding routing Based on the Layer 3 destination address Replacing destination source MAC addresses for each hop Incrementing the hop count Decrementing the time to live Verifying and recalculating the Layer 3 checksum If the destination node is on the same subnetwor
463. st field in the network address is used e 128 191 is class B and the first two fields in the network address are used e 192 223 is class C and the first three fields in the network address are used Command Attributes Subnet Address IP address of a network directly connected to this router IP ROUTING Web Click Routing Protocol RIP Network Addresses Add all interfaces that will participate in RIP and click Apply Network Addresses Current New 10 1 0 0 Subnet Address EA lt lt Add Remove CLI This example includes network interface 10 1 0 0 in the RIP routing process Console config router rip 4 231 Console config router network 10 1 0 0 4 233 Console config router ttend Console show ip rip status 4 242 Peer UpdateTime Version RevBadPackets RcvBadRoutes 0 1 0 253 0 0 73 0 1253 0 0 66 Console Configuring Network Interfaces for RIP For each interface that participates in the RIP routing process you must specify the protocol message type accepted i e RIP version and the message type sent i e RIP version or compatibility mode the method for preventing loopback of protocol messages and whether or not authentication is used i e authentication only applies if RIPv2 messages are being sent or received 3 179 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 180 Command Usage Specifying Receive and Send Protocol Types Setting the RIP Receive Version o
464. st host address community string where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver and community string is the string associated with that host Press lt Enter gt 2 In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command Type snmp server enable traps Ape where type is either authentication or link up down Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 2 11 INITIAL CONFIGURATION Managing System Files 2 12 The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program Web interface or SNMP The swit
465. st mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 85 mac access group 4 87 show mac access list 4 88 permit deny MAC ACL Use this command to add a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a tule Syntax permit deny packer format any host source source bitmask any host destination destination bitmask any ethertype protocol no permit deny packet formal any host source source bitmask any host destination destination bitmask any ethertype protocol packet format tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets 4 85 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 86 any Any MAC source address destination address or Ethernet protocol source Source MAC address source bitmask Binary mask for the source MAC address destination Destination MAC address destination bitmask Binary mask for the destination MAC address protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 0 65535 Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to
466. static routing or dynamic routing via RIP or OSPF and other packets for all non IP protocols e g NetBuei NetWare or AppleTalk are switched based on MAC addtesses If IP routing is disabled all packets are switched with filtering and forwarding decisions based strictly on MAC addresses Default Gateway The routing device to which the switch will pass packets for all unknown subnets i e packets that do not match any routing table entry Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods IP ROUTING Web Click IP General Global Settings Set IP Routing Status to Disabled to restrict operation to Layer 2 or Enabled to allow multilayer switching specify the default gateway which will be forwarded packets for all unknown subnets and click Apply Global Settings IP Routing Status Enabled y Default Gateway 10 1 0 254 Clear default gateway CLI This example enables IP routing and sets the default gateway Console config ip routing 4 226 Console config ip route default 10 1 0 254 4 227 Configuring IP Routing Interfaces You can specify the IP subnets connected to this router by manually assigning an IP address to each VLAN or by using the RIP or OSPF dynamic routing protocol to identify routes that lead to other interfaces by exchanging protocol messages with other routers on the network Command Usage If this router is directly connected to end node devices or
467. stname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering DHCP Configuration These commands are used to configure the DHCP server Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation e Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e Router Configuration These commands configure global settings for unicast and multicast routing protocols VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups ENTERING COMMANDS To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line H 4 13 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 74 Control access list ip extended Console config ext acl List access list mac Console config mac acl DHCP ip dhcp pool Console config dhcp 4 97 Interface interface ethernet port Console config if 4 118 port channel d v
468. stream Router 10 1 0 0 Downstream 234 5 6 8 10 1 5 19 255 255 255 255 Owner PIM DM Upstream Interface vlan3 Upstream Router 10 1 5 19 Downstream Console Configuring DVMRP 3 222 The Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP behaves somewhat similarly to RIP A router supporting DVMRP periodically floods its attached networks to pass information about supported multicast services along to new routers and hosts Routers that receive a DVMRP packet send a copy out to all paths except the path back to the origin These routers then send a prune message back to the source to stop a data stream if the router is attached to a LAN which does not want to receive traffic from a particular multicast group However if a host attached to this router issues an IGMP message indicating that it wants to subscribe to the concerned multicast service this router will use DVMRP MULTICAST ROUTING to build up a source rooted multicast delivery tree that allows it to prevent looping and determine the shortest path to the source of this multicast traffic source branch TOEA por es TECEN So epee oleae Vte poe eleve leaf I i WI When this router receives the multicast message it checks its unicast routing t
469. stricting access for a known host to a specific port DESCRIPTION OF SOFTWARE FEATURES IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 8K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memoty before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames ate a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 8 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol adds a level of fault tolerance by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection
470. switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol Glossary 2 GLOSSARY IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first en
471. t Web Click IP Statistics ICMP ICMP Statistics Messages Errors Destination Unreachable Time Exceeded Parameter Problems Source Quenches Received Sent E Redirects Echos Echo Replies 7 Timestamps Timestamp Replies Address Masks Address Mask Replies 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 olojojojojlolojojojola jo CLI See the example on page 3 164 3 169 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH UDP Statistics User Datagram Protocol UDP provides a datagram mode of packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism providing access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Statistical Values Parameter Description Datagrams Received The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP usets Datagrams Sent The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity Receive Errors The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port No Ports The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port Web Click IP Statistics UDP UDP Statistics Datagrams Received 174 Receive Errors 0 Datagrams Sent 0 No Ports 1
472. t filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN MULTICAST FILTERING This switch not only supports IP multicast filtering by passively monitoring IGMP query and report messages and multicast routing probe messages to register end stations as multicast group members but also supports the DVMRP and PIM DM multicast routing protocols required to forward multicast traffic to other subnets page 3 222 and 3 231 IGMP Protocol The Internet Group Management Protocol GMP runs between hosts and their immediately adjacent multicast router switch IGMP is a multicast host registration protocol that allows any host to inform its local router that it wants to receive transmissions addressed to a specific multicast group A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any adjacent multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Based on the group membership information learned
473. t GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show gatp timer 4 180 4 179 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE show garp timer 4 180 Use this command to show the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer n erface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 4 178 PRIORITY COMMANDS Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues
474. t Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display 3 4 The Web agent displays an image of the switch s ports indicating whether each link is up or down The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active 1 e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 67 Mode Actrve v B LinkUp B Link Down NAVIGATING THE WEB BROWSER INTERFACE Main Menu Using the onboard Web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Menu Description Page System 3 12 System Information Provides basic system description including 3 12 contact information Passwords Assigns a new password for the current user 3 28 Radius Configures RADIUS authentication parameters 3 30
475. t Routing General Setting Multicast Forwarding Status Enabled gt CLI This example enables multicast routing globally for the router Console config ip multicast routing 4 288 Console config Displaying the Multicast Routing Table You can display information on each multicast route this router has learned via DVMRP or PIM The router learns multicast routes from neighboring routers and also advertises these routes to its neighbors The router stores entries for all paths learned by itself or from other routers without considering actual group membership or prune messages The routing table therefore does not indicate that the router has processed multicast traffic from any particular source listed in the table It uses these 3 219 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 220 routes to forward multicast traffic only if group members appear on directly attached subnetworks or on subnetworks attached to downstream routers Field Attributes Group Address IP group address for a multicast service Source Address Subnetwork containing the IP multicast source Netmask Network mask for the IP multicast source Interface Interface leading to the upstream neighbor Owner The associated multicast protocol 1 e DVMRP or PIM Flags The flags associated with each interface indicate prune P if the downstream interface has been recently terminated or forwarding F if the interface is still acti
476. t SNTP configuration settings NE 4 45 PE clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 46 4 41 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE sntp client 4 42 Use this command to enable SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form of this command to disable SNTP client requests Syntax sntp client no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 e This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command The SNTP time query method is set to client mode when the first sntp client command is issued However if the sntp broadcast client command is issued then the no sntp broadcast client command must be used to return the switch to SNTP client mode SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Example Console config Hsntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode un
477. t command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts recetve SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 93 show snmp Use this command to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command 4 95 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 4 96 Example Console show snmp SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs 0 Set request PDUs ooooooo O SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs ooooo SNMP logging disabled Console DHCP COMMANDS DHCP Commands These commands ate used to config
478. t traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to six trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by re
479. t_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 24 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate 9600 Connection Data Lis 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled SYSTEM DEFAULTS Function Parameter Default Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec Password super from Normal Exec Level RADIUS Authentication Disabled 802 1x Port Authentication Disabled Web HTTP Server Enabled Management erie Port Number 80 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled Port Admin Status Enabled Configuration Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Port Capability OOBASE TX 0 Mbps half duplex 0 Mbps full duplex 00 Mbps half duplex 00 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled 000BASE T 0 Mbps half duplex 0 Mbps full duplex 00 Mbps half duplex 00 Mbps full duplex 000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled 1 9 INTRODUCTION Function Parameter Default Port Capability 1000BASE SX LX
480. table GC 4 144 aging time show Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 145 n mac address table aging time mac address table static Use this command to map a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mav address interface interface vlan v an d action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address gt interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe id Range 1 4 e vlan id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 4 141 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE clear 4 142 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table e A static address cannot
481. tation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 111 But you can 3 105 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 106 still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the network Sano DUDO TARRAT UA Port based VLAN MEANS LA w A a o a COLELL qe paja reese Ieee alla ea Saeee uy 10 11 NE 15 16 O A a E le NE is my Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN
482. tch contains three firmware components that can be upgraded the loader code diagnostics or Boot ROM code and runtime operation code The runtime code can be upgraded via the switch s RS 232 serial console port via a network connection to a TFTP server or using SNMP management software The loader code and diagnostics code can be upgraded only via the switch s RS 232 serial console port Note You can use the switch s web interface to download runtime code via TFTP Downloading large runtime code files via TFTP is normally much faster than downloading via the switch s serial port You can upgrade switch firmware by connecting a PC directly to the serial Console port on the switch s front panel and using VT100 terminal emulation software that supports the XModem protocol See Required Connections on page 2 2 1 Connect a PC to the switch s Console port using a null modem or crossover RS 232 cable with a female DB 9 connector 2 Configure the terminal emulation software s communication parameters to 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and set flow control to none 3 Power cycle the switch 4 When the switch initialization screen appears enter firmware download mode by pressing lt Ctrl gt lt u gt immediately after UPGRADING FIRMWARE VIA THE SERIAL PORT B 2 10 11 power on or rebooting the switch Screen text similar to that shown below displays File Name S Up Type Size Create T
483. te is marked inaccessible i e the metric set to infinite and advertised as unreachable However packets are still forwarded on this route After the meout interval expires the router waits for an interval specified by the garbage collection timer before removing this entry from the routing table This timer allows neighbors to become aware of an invalid route prior to purging it e Setting the update timer to a short interval can cause the router to spend an excessive amount of time processing updates These timers must be set to the same values for all routers in the network Example This example sets the update timer to 40 seconds The timeout timer is subsequently set to 240 seconds and the garbage collection timer to 160 seconds Console config router timers basic 15 Console config router network Use this command to specify the network interfaces that will be included in the RIP routing process Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax network subnet address no network subnet address subnet address IP address of a network directly connected to this router Command Mode Router Configuration 4 233 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting No networks are specified Command Usage RIP only sends updates to interfaces specified by this command Subnet addresses are interpreted as class A B or C based on the first field in the specified address In other words if a s
484. ted by any ABR adjacent to the NSSA into external LSAs Type 5 and propagated into other areas within the AS Also note that unlike stub areas all Type 3 summary LSAs are always imported into NSSAs to ensure that internal routes are always chosen over Type 7 NSSA external routes This router supports up to 16 total areas either normal transit areas stubs or NSSAs Example This example creates a stub area 10 3 0 0 and assigns all interfaces with class B addresses 10 3 x x to the NSSA It also instructs the router to generate external LSAs into the NSSA when it is an NSSA ABR or NSSA ASBR Console config router tarea 10 3 0 0 nssa default information originate Console config router network 10 3 0 0 255 255 0 0 area 10 2 0 0 Console config router 4 259 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE area virtual link 4 260 Use this command to define a virtual link To remove a virtual link use the no form with no optional keywords To restore the default value for an attribute use the no form with the required keyword Syntax area area id virtual link router id authentication message digest null hello interval seconds retransmit interval seconds transmit delay seconds dead interval seconds authentication key ey message digest key key id md5 ke no area area id virtual link router id authentication message digest null hello interval seconds retransmit interval seconds transmit delay s
485. teps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Default 2 Minimum 1 Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states 1 e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops
486. ter VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the VLAN CONFIGURATION media access method ot data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes e PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group e Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames Ifingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those V
487. ter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP A network layer protocol that reports errors in processing IP packets ICMP is also used by routers to feed back information about better routing choices Glossary 3 GLOSSARY Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast router on a given subnetwork one of the routers is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of
488. terfaces 000 ee eee eee 4 Interface VIAN oo aie hea Sa A see oe 4 139 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 162 162 162 163 164 CONTENTS switchport mode candado E 4 166 switchport acceptable frame types oooomooooooo 4 167 switchport ingress filtering 2 0 0 0 0 0 4 168 switchport native vlan 6 eee 4 169 switchport allowed vlan 0 cece eee 4 170 switchport forbidden vlan 1 0 02 0 ee eee 4 171 Displaying VLAN Information 00 00 eee 4 172 SHOW VIAN rectus Slice Mise cha toe RSet Sees Sine Saya R 4 172 Configuring Private VLANS 0 0 0 0 0c cece ee eee 4 173 Pr fat kN EA GN A A doc shear eet rl 4 173 show Pla as 4 174 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands o ooccooocccccccoco 4 175 ridge ext Cvi pe 24 fan eh ei tide yeaa 4 175 show bridge ext 6 eee ee eee 4 176 SwitchpOrt VIP ny taicaaa diodes Se a ded Acs 4 177 show gvtp configuration 6 6 eee eee 4 178 PAL PMOL a ties coh in Me at aah Seah a vaeie el 4 178 show garp timer sah dA acted kA tke i deans ee 4 180 Priority Commands ltda a ee ied ig 4 181 Priority Commands Layer 2 0 ee eee 4 181 switchport priority default 00 0 0 e eee 4 182 queue bandwidth 1 00 ae eee eee 4 183 QUEUE COS Mapi iy tc Saat ithe ei an eee ok 4 184 show queue bandwidth o oo oocoooocccccnoooo 4 185 show queue COS MaP 6 ee
489. the DHCP address pool e Subnet Mask The bit combination that identifies the network or subnet and the host portion of the DHCP address pool Setting the Host Parameters IP The IP address of the DHCP address pool Subnet Mask Specifies the network mask of the client e Hardware Address Specifies the MAC address and protocol used on the client Options Ethernet IEEE802 FDDI Default Ethernet e Client Identifier A unique designation for the client device either a text string 1 15 characters or hexadecimal value Setting the Optional Parameters Default Router The IP address of the primary and alternate gateway router The IP address of the router should be on the same subnet as the client DNS Server The IP address of the primary and alternate DNS server DNS servers must be configured for a DHCP client to map host names to IP addresses e Netbios Server IP address of the primary and alternate NetBIOS Windows Internet Naming Service WINS name server used for Microsoft DHCP clients e Netbios Type NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients Options Broadcast Hybrid Mixed Peer to Peer Default Hybrid Domain Name The domain name of the client Range 1 32 characters Dynamic Host CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL Bootfile The default boot image for a DHCP client This file should placed on the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server specified as the Next Serv
490. the address range for the area specified in first command and ignore the overlapping ranges in subsequent commands However note that if a more specific address range is removed from an area the interface belonging to that range may still remain active if a less specific address range covering that area has been specified This router supports up to 64 OSPF router interfaces and up to 16 total areas either normal transit areas stubs or NSSAs Example This example creates the backbone 0 0 0 0 covering class B addresses 10 1 x x and a normal transit area 10 2 9 0 covering the class C addresses 10 2 9 x Console config router network 10 1 0 0 255 255 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 Console config router network 10 2 9 0 255 255 255 0 area 10 1 0 0 Console config router IP ROUTING COMMANDS area stub Use this command to define a stub atea To remove a stub use the no form without the optional keyword To remove the summary attribute use the no form with the summary keyword Syntax area area id stub summary no area area id stub summary e area id Identifies the stub area The area ID must be in the form of an IP address summary Makes an Area Border Router ABR send a summary link advertisement into the stub area Default no summary Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting No stub is configured Command Usage All routers in a stub must be configured with the same area ID e Routi
491. the autonomous system AS via External LSAs Specify Type 1 to add the internal cost metric to the external route metric In other words the cost of the route from any router within the AS is equal to the cost associated with reaching the advertising ASBR plus the cost of the external route Specify Type 2 to only advertise external route metric e The metric value specified for redistributed routes supersedes the Default External Metric specified in the OSPF General Configuration screen page 3 188 IP ROUTING Command Attributes e Redistribute Protocol Specifies the external routing protocol type for which routing information is to be redistributed into the local routing domain Options RIP Static Default RIP Redistribute Metric Type Indicates the method used to calculate external route costs Options Type 1 Type 2 Default Type 1 e Redistribute Metric Metric assigned to all external routes for the specified protocol Range 1 65535 Default 10 Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Redistribute Configuration Specify the protocol type to import the metric type and path cost then click Add Redistribute Configuration Current Redistribute Protocol Redistribute Protocol Redistribute Metric Type Redistribute Metric Remove RIP Typel 10 Entry Count 1 Remove Redistribute Settings Redistribute Protocol RIP y Redistribute Metric Type Typel Redistribute Metric 0 16777215 10 S
492. there are Version 1 hosts present which are members of the group for which it heard the report If there are Version 1 hosts present for a particular group the switch will ignore any Leave Group messages that it receives for that group Web Click IP IGMP IGMP Group Information IGMP Group Membership Group Address Interface Last Reporter Uptime Expire V1 Timer 234 5 6 7 VLAN2 10 1 0 19 6077 209 0 234 5 6 8 VLAN3 10 1 5 19 6067 26 0 Entry Count 2 CLI The following shows the IGMP groups currently active on VLAN 1 Console show ip igmp groups vlan 1 4 213 GroupAddress InterfaceVlan Lastreporter Uptime Expire ViTimer a 234 5 6 8 1 10 1 5 19 7068 220 0 Console IP Routing Overview This switch supports IP routing and routing path management via static routing definitions page 3 172 and dynamic routing such as RIP page 3 175 or OSPF page 3 186 When IP routing is enabled page 3 176 this switch acts as a wire speed router passing traffic between VLANs using different IP interfaces and routing traffic to external IP 3 149 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 150 networks However when the switch is first booted no default routing is defined As with all traditional routers the routing functions must first be configured to work Initial Configuration In the default configuration all ports belong to the same VLAN and the switch provides only Layer 2 functionality Therefore fir
493. thernet 1 11 4 286 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 287 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 3 141 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 142 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members e Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast setvice Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 1 Multicast IP Address 2241 1 12 Multicast Group Port List Unit Portl User CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1 4 200 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console MULTICAST FILTERING Assigning Ports to
494. this device and set the other basic protocol parameters Command Attributes General Information OSPF Routing Process Enables or disables OSPF routing for all IP interfaces on the router Default Disabled IP ROUTING OSPF Router ID Assigns a unique router ID for this device within the autonomous system Default The lowest interface address e Version Number This router only supports OSPF Version 2 Area Border Router Indicates if this router connect directly to networks in two or more areas aaie TAR area stub An area border router runs a NSSA separate copy of the Shortest Path First algorithm maintaining a separate routing database for each area AS Boundary Router oe Allows this router to exchange routing AS1 ASBR ASBR AS 2 information with boundary routers in other autonomous systems to which it may be attached If a router is enabled as an ASBR then every other router in the autonomous system can learn about external routes from this device Default Disabled Rfc1583 Compatible If one or more routers in a routing domain are using OSPF Version 1 this router should use RFC 1583 OSPFv1 compatibility mode to ensure that all routers are using the same RFC for calculating summary route costs Enable this field to force the router to calculate summary route costs using RFC 1583 Default Disa
495. time is 60 sec Graft retry interval is 9 sec max graft retries is 5 DR Internet address is 10 1 1 253 neighbor count is 0 Console 3 235 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 236 Displaying Interface Information You can display a summary of the current interface status for PIM DM including the number of neighboring PIM routers and the address of the designated PIM router Command Attributes Interface A VLAN interface on this router Address The IP address for this interface Mode The PIM mode in use This router only supports Dense Mode at this time Neighbor Count The number of PIM neighbors detected on this interface DR Address The designated PIM router for this interface Web Click Routing Protocol PIM DM Interface Information PIM DM Interface Information Interface Address Mode Neighbor Count DR Address VLAN 10 1 0 252 Dense 1 10 1 0 253 VLANIO 10 1 9 252 Dense O 10 1 9 252 Entry Count 2 CLI This example shows the PIM DM interface summary for VLAN 1 Console show ip pim interface 1 4 309 Vlan 1 is up PIM is enabled mode is Dense Internet address is 10 1 0 253 Hello time interval is 30 sec trigger hello time interval is 5 sec Hello holdtime is 105 sec Join Prune holdtime is 210 sec Graft retry interval is 3 sec max graft retries is 2 DR Internet address is 10 1 0 253 neighbor count is 1 Console MULTICAST ROUTING
496. tion Command lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC 4 139 Trunk Status Display Command show interfaces Shows trunk information NE 4 128 status port channel PE Guidelines for Creating Trunks Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to four 10 100 Mbps ports or up to two 1000 Mbps ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must consist of the same media type e twisted pair or fiber All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings 4 137 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel channel group 4 138 Use this command to add a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 6 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Ci
497. tion at this entity Routing Discards The number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries Reassembly Successful The number of datagrams successfully re assembled Datagrams Successfully Fragmented The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity Web Click IP Statistics IP IP Statistics Packets Received Received Address Errors Received Packets Discarded Output Requests Output Packet No Route Datagrams Forwarded Reassembly Required Reassembly Failures Datagrams Failing Fragmentation Received Header Errors 0 0 Unknown Protocols Recewed 0 0 Received Packets Delivered 2364 2670 Discarded Output Packets lO 2 Fragments Created 10 Routing Discards 0 Reassembly Successful 0 3 0 0 Datagrams Successfully Fragmented lo 0 CLI See the example on page 3 164 3 167 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH ICMP Statistics Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a network layer protocol that transmits message packets to report errors in processing IP packets ICMP is therefore an integral part of the Internet Protocol ICMP messages may be used to report various situations such as when a datagram cannot reach its destination when the gateway does not have the buffering capacity to forward
498. tmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets e Gateway IP address of the gateway used for this route e Metric Cost for this interface This cost is only used if a route is imported by a dynamic routing protocol such as OSPF Range 1 5 default 1 Entry Count The number of table entries IP ROUTING Web Click IP Routing Static Routes Static Routes Current New IP Address lt lt Add Netmask AA Remove nenep O Metric fi Interface IPAddress Netmask Nexthop Mertic 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 254 1 Clear all static routes Entry Count 1 CLI This example forwards all traffic for subnet 192 168 1 0 to the router 192 168 5 254 using the default metric of 1 Console config tip route 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 5 254 4 227 Console config Displaying the Routing Table You can display all the routes that can be accessed via the local network interfaces via static routes or via a dynamically learned route If route information is available through more than one of these methods the priority for route selection is local static and then dynamic Also note that the route for a local interface is not enabled i e listed in the routing table unless there is at least one active link connected to that interface Command Attributes Interface Index number of t
499. to define generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity e even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line 4 21 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE speed 4 22 Use this command to set the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Default Setting 9600 bps Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line LINE COMMANDS stopbits Use this command to set the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting
500. to routing Routes are determined on the basis of minimizing the distance vector or hop count which serves as a rough estimate of transmission cost Each router broadcasts its advertisement every 30 seconds together with any updates to its routing table This allows all routers on the network to learn consistent tables of next hop links which lead to relevant subnets AV B _ gt Cc A Link Cost ae 2 Y alo 0 B 1 1 i 4 5 gt c 1 2 D 3 1 MN E 1 2 D m E C W Cost 1 for all links Routing table for node A Command Usage Just as Layer 2 switches use the Spanning Tree Algorithm to prevent loops routers also use methods for preventing loops that would cause endless retransmission of data traffic RIP utilizes the following three methods to prevent loops from occurring Split horizon Never propagate routes back to an interface port from which they have been acquired Poison reverse Propagate routes back to an interface port from which they have been acquired but set the distance vector metrics to infinity This provides faster convergence Triggered updates Whenever a route gets changed broadcast an update message after waiting for a short random delay but without waiting for the periodic cycle e RIP 2 is a compatible upgrade to RIP RIP 2 adds useful capabilities for plain text authentication multiple independent RIP domains variable length subnet masks and multicast transmissions for route adv
501. ts for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 203 4 202 MULTICAST FILTERING COMMANDS ip igmp snooping quety interval Use this command to configure the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config ip igmp snooping quety max response time Use this command to configure the query report delay Use the no form of this command to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds T
502. tting the System Clock 1 0 6 momo 3 25 Configuring SNIP il a ai A 3 26 Setting the Time Zone nA ai es os 3 27 Resetting the System roari eiaa cece eee 3 28 User Authentication a e aa dust ias 3 28 Configuring the Logon Password o coooooocccocooooo 3 28 Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 3 30 Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication oooo m oooooo 3 32 Displaying 802 1x Global Settings oooo 3 34 Configuring 802 1x Global Settings ooooo o 3 36 Configuring Port Authorization Mode 3 38 Displaying 802 1x Statistics 2 0 6 eee ee eee eee 3 39 Access Gomtrol Lists it a a sak wll alls doe ds taco std 3 41 Configuring Access Control Lists 2 1 2 0 00 0 0 c eee ee 3 41 Setting the ACL Name and Type 0004 3 42 Configuring a Standard IP ACL oooo ooooomococ o o 3 43 Configuring an Extended IP ACL 0 3 44 Configuring a MAC ACL 6 cece eee eee 3 47 Binding a Port to an Access Control List ooooo o 3 49 Simple Network Management Protocol 000 eee eee 3 50 Setting Community Access Strings oooooococcommmoo 3 50 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3 51 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 0 0 60 0 00 c eee eee 3 53 Configuring DHCP Relay Service ooooooococcommmoo 3 53 Configuring the DHCP Servet n nuus 00 eee eee 3 55 Enabling the Server Setting Excluded Addresses
503. tual link The retransmit interval should be set to a conservative value that provides an adequate flow of routing information but does not produce unnecessary protocol traffic However note that this value should be larger for virtual links Range 1 3600 seconds Default 5 seconds transmit delay seconds Estimates the time required to send a link state update packet over the virtual link considering the transmission and propagation delays LSAs have their age incremented by this amount before transmission This value must be the same for all routers attached to an autonomous system Range 1 3600 seconds Default 1 seconds e dead interval seconds Specifies the time that neighbor routers will wait for a hello packet before they declare the router down This value must be the same for all routers attached to an autonomous system Range 1 65535 seconds Default 4 x hello interval or 40 seconds e authentication key key Sets a plain text password up to 8 characters that is used by neighboring routers on a virtual link to generate or verify the authentication field in protocol message headers A separate password can be assigned to each network interface However this key must be the same for all neighboring routers on the same network 1 e autonomous system This key is only used when authentication is enabled for the backbone message digest key key id md5 key Sets the key identifier and password to be used to authenti
504. ty no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree e Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 154 4 155 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE spanning tree edge port Use this command to specify an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree edge port no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current
505. type is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 ACCESS CONTROL LISTS Web Click ACL ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name devid Type Standard y Add CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard bill 4 76 Console config std acl Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules IP Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any e Address Source IP address SubMask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this AC
506. u can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames or clear it to auto negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a 3 67 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Trunk Configuration on page 3 79
507. u can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands Understanding Command Modes 4 6 The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The ENTERING COMMANDS command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List DHCP Interface Line Router VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and passwotd guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited num
508. u encounter problems in maintaining a multicast flow then you may need to modify the protocol variables which control the exchange of topology information between DVMRP routers such as the probe interval neighbor timeout or report interval Command Attributes e DVMRP Protocol Enables disables DVMRP globally Default Disabled Probe Interval Sets the interval for sending neighbor probe messages to the multicast group address for all DVMRP routers Probe messages are sent to neighboring DVMRP routers from which this device has received probes and is used to verify whether or not these neighbors are still active members of the multicast tree Range 1 65535 seconds Default 10 seconds Neighbor Timeout Interval Sets the interval to wait for messages from a DVMRP neighbor before declaring it dead This command is used for timing out routes and for setting the children and leaf flags Range 1 65535 seconds Default 35 seconds e Report Interval Specifies how often to propagate the complete set of routing tables to other neighbor DVMRP routers Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds Flash Update Interval Specifies how often to send trigger updates which reflect changes in the network topology Prune Lifetime Specifies how long a prune state will remain in effect for a multicast tree Range 1 65535 Default 7200 seconds Default Gateway Specifies the default DVMRP gateway for IP mu
509. ubnet address nnn xxx xxx xxx is entered the first field ann determines the class 0 127 is class A and only the first field in the network address is used 128 191 is class B and the first two fields in the network address are used 192 223 is class C and the first three fields in the network address are used Example This example includes network interface 10 1 0 0 in the RIP routing process Console config router network 10 1 0 0 Console config router Related Commands router rip 4 231 neighbor 4 234 Use this command to define a neighboring router with which this router will exchange routing information Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax neighbor p address no neighbor p address p address IP address to map to a specified hardware address Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting No neighbors are defined IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Usage This command can be used to configure a static neighbor with which this router will exchange information rather than relying on broadcast messages generated by the RIP protocol Example Console config router neighbor 10 2 0 254 Console config router version Use this command to specify a RIP version used globally by the router Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax version 1 2 no version e 1 RIP Version 1 2 RIP Version 2 Command Mode Router Configuration Default Setting
510. uivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where t he equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Sync 4 rst Reset hronize 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 ACCESS CONTROL LIST COMMANDS Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any dport 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any tcp
511. umber at 800 762 4968 Customers ate responsible for all shipping charges from their facility to SMC SMC is responsible for return shipping charges from SMC to customer vi WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF AN SMC PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT IN QUESTION AT SMC S OPTION THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SMC NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS SMC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SMC BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE LOSS OF BUSINESS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN
512. unction Mode Page pvlan Enables and configured private VLANS GC 4 173 show pvlan Displays the configured private VLANS PE 4 174 pvlan Use this command to enable or configure a private VLAN Use the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link ierface list down link interface hisi no pvlan up link Specifies an uplink interface e down link Specifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs ate defined Command Mode Global Configuration 4 173 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Usage A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port e Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 25 as the uplink and ports 1 8 as the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 25 down link ethernet 1 1 8 Console config show pvlan Use this command to display the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 25 Down link port Ethernet 1 1 8 Console 4 174 GVRP AND BR
513. ure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client relay and server functions You can configure any VLAN interface to be automatically assigned an IP address via DHCP This switch can be configured to relay DHCP client configuration requests to a DHCP server on another network or you can configure this switch to provide DHCP service directly to any client Command Function Page Group DHCP Client Allows interfaces to dynamically acquire IP address 4 97 information DHCP Relay Relays DHCP requests from local hosts to a remote 4 99 DHCP server DHCP Server Configures DHCP service using address pools or static 4 102 bindings DHCP Client Command Function Mode Page ip dhcp Specifies the DHCP client identifier for this IC 4 97 client identifier switch ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 4 98 client ip dhcp client identifier Use this command to specify the DCHP client identifier for the current interface Use the no form to remove this identifier Syntax ip dhcp client identifier text fext hex hex no ip dhcp client identifier e text A text string Range 1 15 characters e hex The hexadecimal value 4 97 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage This command is used to include a client identifier in all communications with the DHCP server The identifier ty
514. ute network netmask network Network or subnet address netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets e Removes all dynamic routing table entries Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command only clears dynamically learned routes Use the no ip address command to remove a local interface Use the no ip route command to remove a static route Example Console clear ip route 10 1 5 0 Console show ip route Use this command to display information in the IP routing table Syntax show ip route config address netmask e config Displays all static routing entries e address IP address of the destination network subnetwork or host for which routing information is to be displayed e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 228 IP ROUTING COMMANDS Command Usage If the address is specified without the netmask parameter the router displays all routes for the corresponding natural class address page 4 233 Example Console show ip route Ip Address Netmask Next Hop Protocol Metric Interface 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 2 48 102 static 0 1 10 2 48 2 209325020260 10 2 48 16 local 0 1 10 2 5 6 259 255 255 0 10 2 8 12 RIP 1 2 10 6375 Mes 255 2597255 0
515. uted algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device It selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device It then selects a port on the designated bridging device to communicate with each attached LAN or host device as a designated port After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops 7 Designated Ny Root Cy LoS a AA QUES x x Root 4 gt Port a A K Nea a Designated j X UL Pas a Designated x lt oad Port Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network to
516. utonomous system to improve the security of the routing database However the password must be used consistently on all neighboring routers throughout a network Message Digest Key id Assigns a key id used in conjunction with the authentication key to verify the authenticity of routing protocol messages sent to neighboring routers Range 1 255 Default none Normally only one key is used per interface to generate authentication information for outbound packets and to authenticate incoming packets Neighbor routers must use the same key identifier and key value 3 201 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH When changing to a new key the router will send multiple copies of all protocol messages one with the old key and another with the new key Once all the neighboring routers start sending protocol messages back to this router with the new key the router will stop using the old key This rollover process gives the network administrator time to update all the routers on the network without affecting the network connectivity Once all the network routers have been updated with the new key the old key should be removed for security reasons Web Click Routing Protocol OSPF Interface Configuration Select the required interface from the scroll down box and click Detailed Settings Interface Configuration OSPF Interface List of VLAN ID 1 y Detail Setting Interface IP Area ID Designated Router Backup DesignatedRouter 10 1
517. ve Detail This button displays detailed information for the selected entry Upstream Router The multicast router immediately upstream for this group Downstream Interface s on which multicast subscribers have been recorded These items are displayed in the IP Multicast Routing Entry Detail table MULTICAST ROUTING Web Click IP Multicast Routing Multicast Routing Table Click Detail to display additional information for any entry IP Multicast Routing Table Summary Flags P Prune Up Group Address Source Address Netmask Interface Owner Flags Detail 234 5 6 7 10 1 0 0 255 255 255 0 VLAN2 234 5 6 8 10 1 5 19 255 255 255 255 VLAN3 Entry Count 2 IP Multicast Routing Entry Detail IP Multicast Routing Table Flags P Y Prune F Forwarding Source Address 10 1 0 0 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Group Address 234567 Owner DYMRP Upstream Interface VLAN 2 Upstream Router 10 1 0 0 Downstream none DYMRP PIM DM Detail Detail 3 221 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH CLI This example shows that multicast forwarding is enabled The multicast routing table displays one entry for a multicast source routed by DVMRBP and another source routed via PIM Console show ip mroute 4 288 IP Multicast Forwarding is enabled IP Multicast Routing Table Flags P Prune F Forwarding 2340506017 100100 2555255 255 0 Owner DVMRP Upstream Interface vlan2 Up
518. ve Errors OO O 010 RMON Statistics Drop Events D Jabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 064 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames 47 65 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 1 CRC Alignment Errors 0 256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh 3 76 PORT CONFIGURATION CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 129 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octet
519. ver The configuration options for parameters are described in this section Command Attributes dot1X Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Timeout for Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled dot1X Max Request Count Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 USER AUTHENTICATION Timeout for Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the dot1X Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds Timeout for Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds Timeout for TX Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds authentication dotlx default Sets the default authentication server type Note that the specified authentication server type must be enabled and properly configured for dot1x to function properly Options radius CLI only Web Select dot1X dot1X Configuration Enable dot1x globally for the switch modif
520. ver you can s to the switch s output queues in any way that taffic for your own network Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background Spate default Best Effort Excellent Effort Controlled Load mB WO oO Mm Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control CLASS OF SERVICE CONFIGURATION Command Attributes Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 3 where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue CLI shows Queue ID Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Mark an interface and click Select to display the current mapping of CoS values to output queues Assign priorities to the traffic classes 1 e output queues for the selected interface then click Apply Traffic Classes Interface G Port ba C Trung 7 Select Priority Traffic Class P e3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 9 3 123 CONFI GURING THE SWITCH CLI The following example shows how to map CoS values 0 1 and 2 to priority queue 0 value 3 to priority queue 1 values 4 and 5 to priority queue 2 and values 6 and 7 to priority queue 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 119 Console config queue cos map 0 0 1 2 4 184 Console config queue cos map 1 3 Console config queue cos map 2 4 5
521. vice DHCP CoMMANDS Example Console clear ip dhcp binding Console Related Commands show ip dhcp binding 4 117 show ip dhcp binding Use this command to display address bindings on the DHCP server Syntax show ip dhcp binding address address Specifies the IP address of the DHCP client for which bindings will be displayed Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp binding IP MAC Lease Time Start 192 1 3 21 00 00 e8 98 73 21 86400 Dec 25 08 01 57 2002 Console 4 117 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters GC 4 119 interface configuration mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4 119 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a IC 4 120 given interface when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 121 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface IC 4 122 for use in autonegotiation flowconttol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4 124 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 125 switchport Configures the broadcast storm control IC 4 126 broadcast threshold packet
522. wcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 121 speed duplex 4 120 flowcontrol 4 124 4 123 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE flowcontrol 4 124 Use this command to enable flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax flowcontrol no flowcontrol Default Setting Flow control enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface e When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port e Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub INTEREACE COMMANDS Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console
523. witch which uses its own routing table to reach the destination on the other network 1 7 INTRODUCTION Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query at Layer 2 and IGMP at Layer 3 to manage multicast group registration Multicast Routing Routing for multicast packets is supported by the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP and Protocol Independent Multicasting Dense Mode PIM DM These protocols work in conjunction with IGMP to filter and route multicast traffic DVMRP is a more comprehensive implementation that maintains its own routing table but is gradually being replacing by most network managers with PIM Dense Mode and Sparse Mode PIM is a very simple protocol that uses the routing table of the unicast routing protocol enabled on an interface Dense Mode is designed for areas where the probability of multicast clients is relatively high and the overhead of frequent flooding is justified While Sparse mode is designed for network areas such as the Wide Area Network where the probability of multicast clients is low This switch currently supports DVMRP and PIM DM System Defaults 1 8 The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Defaul
524. witch 3 163 Statistics Shows statistics on ARP requests sent and 3 164 received IGMP 3 144 Interface Settings Configures Layer 3 IGMP for specific VLAN _ 3 145 interfaces Group Membership Displays the current multicast groups learned via 3 148 IGMP Statistics 3 165 IP Shows statistics for IP traffic including the 3 165 amount of traffic address errors routing fragmentation and reassembly ICMP Shows statistics for ICMP traffic including the 3 168 amount of traffic protocol errors and the number of echoes timestamps and address masks UDP Shows statistics for UDP including the amount 3 170 of traffic and errors TCP Shows statistics for TCP including the amount 3 171 of traffic and TCP connection activity Routing 3 151 Static Routes Shows all static routing entries 3 172 Routing Table Shows all routing entries including local static 3 173 and dynamic routes Multicast Routing 3 218 General Settings Globally enables multicast routing 3 219 Multicast Routing Shows each multicast route this switch has 3 219 Table learned 3 9 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 10 Menu Description Page Routing Protocol 3 152 RIP 3 175 General Settings Enables or disables RIP sets the global RIP 3 176 version and timer values Network Addresses Configures the network interfaces that will use 3 178 RIP Interface Settings Configure RIP parameters for each interface 3
525. y Configuration Port Default Priority Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk en 4 2 en 4 3 E 4 4 o en 4 5 fp 4 zj CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 119 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 182 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 5 4 131 Information of Eth 1 5 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 5 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console 3 121 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3 122 This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using four priority queues for each port with service schedules based on Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 to recommendations following table 1p The default priority levels are assigned according in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the Queue 0 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications map the priority leve benefits application t are shown in the following table Howe
526. y allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features e Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol e Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs e End stations can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices
527. y any of the parameters required and then click Apply dot1X Configuration dott Re authentication F Enable dot1X Max Request Count 1 10 fa Timeout for Quiet Period 0 65535 fo seconds Timeout for Re authentication Period 0 65535 Beo seconds Timeout for Tx Penod 1 65535 30 seconds CLI This example enables re authentication and sets all of the global parameters for dot1x Console config dotlx re authentication 4 69 Console config dotlx max req 5 4 68 Console config dotlx timeout quiet period 40 4 70 Console config dotlx timeout re auth 5 4 70 Console config dotlx timeout tx period 40 4 71 Console config authentication dotlx default radius 4 67 Console config 3 37 CONFIGURING THE SWITCH 3 38 Configuring Port Authorization Mode When dot1x is enabled you need to specify the dot1x authentication mode configured for each port Command Attributes Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port e Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dotlx aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise e Authorized Yes
528. y default settings for the key variables or to configure the global setting for GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Command Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 120 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 84 e VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 102 e Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges i e multiple Spanning Trees GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN infor
529. yntax logging on no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 38 clear logging 4 39 4 37 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE logging history Use this command to limit syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory 1 e permanent memory e ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Level Argument Level Description debugging 7 Debugging messages informational 6 Informational messages only notifications 5 Normal but significant condition such as cold start warnings 4 Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return errors 3 Error conditions e g invalid input default used critical 2 Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted alerts 1 Immediate action nee
530. zed by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access e force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dotlx awate or otherwise e force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dotlx awate or otherwise 4 68 AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx port control auto Console config if dotlx re authenticate Forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dotlx re authenticate nterface interface ethernet wnit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console dotlx re authenticate Console dotlx re authentication Enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax dotlx re authentication no dotlx re authentication 4 69 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dotlx re authentication Console config dot1x timeout quiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form of this command to reset the default Syntax dotlx timeout quiet period seconds no dotlx timeout

SMC Networks SMC6724L3 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents